WO2023165387A1 - Communication method and device - Google Patents

Communication method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023165387A1
WO2023165387A1 PCT/CN2023/077625 CN2023077625W WO2023165387A1 WO 2023165387 A1 WO2023165387 A1 WO 2023165387A1 CN 2023077625 W CN2023077625 W CN 2023077625W WO 2023165387 A1 WO2023165387 A1 WO 2023165387A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
carrier
information
terminal device
configuration
configurations
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/077625
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
才宇
徐海博
薛丽霞
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202210420954.2A external-priority patent/CN116761266A/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023165387A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023165387A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • SL Sidelink
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • Different terminal devices may be configured with the same or different carriers. If different carriers are configured for different terminal devices, the terminal device as the sending end sends sidelink data to the terminal device as the receiving end on the carrier of the terminal device, and the receiving end is configured with another carrier, then the receiving end It will only listen on this other carrier, so the receiving end cannot receive the sidelink data. This problem needs to be solved urgently.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to improve the receiving success rate of a receiving end.
  • a first communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including terminal device functions, or by a chip system (or chip) or other functional modules, the chip system or functional modules
  • the function of the terminal device can be realized, and the chip system or the functional module is set in the terminal device, for example.
  • the terminal device is, for example, the first terminal device.
  • the method includes: determining N types of carrier configurations, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier for the second terminal device
  • the terminal device sends information carriers to the first terminal device, where N is a positive integer; and sends first configuration information to the second terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first terminal device may send first configuration information to the second terminal device, and each carrier configuration indicated by the first configuration information may indicate a carrier used for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, And/or indicate the carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device.
  • the second terminal device can determine on which carrier(s) the second terminal device should receive information from the first terminal device, and/or determine which carrier(s) the second terminal device should receive information from the first terminal device on The first terminal device sends information. That is to say, through the first configuration information, both the transmitting and receiving parties can specify the carrier used by the two parties for communication, so that the information sent by the transmitting end can be correctly received by the receiving end, and the receiving success rate of the receiving end is improved.
  • the first configuration information includes frequency information of the carrier, or includes the The index of the carrier.
  • the carrier can be indicated through the frequency information of the carrier, which is relatively clear.
  • it may be indicated by the index of the carrier.
  • the index of the carrier has a small amount of information, which is beneficial to save signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes: receiving confirmation information from the second terminal device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the second terminal device to accept the first of the N types of carrier configurations.
  • Carrier configuration or instructing the second terminal device to accept part of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration of the N types of carrier configurations; or, receiving rejection information from the second terminal device, where the rejection information is used to indicate the
  • the second terminal device rejects the N types of carrier configurations; or, receiving second configuration information from the second terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the carrier configuration expected by the second terminal device.
  • the second terminal device may accept one of the N carrier configurations, or accept a part of the configuration included in one of the N carrier configurations.
  • the second terminal device can be considered to have accepted the N carrier configurations. carrier configuration. Then the second terminal device can send confirmation information to the first terminal device, so that the configuration process ends, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device can use the configuration accepted by the second terminal device to communicate. Alternatively, the second terminal device may not accept the N types of carrier configurations, and the second terminal device may send rejection information and/or second configuration information to the first terminal device. If the first terminal device receives the rejection information, the first terminal device may reconfigure the carrier for the second terminal device, or may also stop the configuration process.
  • the first terminal device can use the second configuration information as a reference to reconfigure the carrier for the second terminal device, which can not only improve the configuration success rate, but also make the configured The carrier meets the requirements of the second terminal device.
  • the method before determining the N types of carrier configurations, further includes: receiving capability information from the second terminal device, where the capability information includes one or more of the following: the first The frequency band information supported by the second terminal device, the frequency band combination information supported by the second terminal device, or the support capability information of the second terminal device for multiple carriers.
  • the first terminal device can first obtain the carrier from the second terminal device. capability information.
  • the method before receiving capability information from the second terminal device, the method further includes: sending capability query information to the second terminal device, where the capability query information is used to request the The second terminal device provides capability information.
  • the second terminal device may proactively send capability information to the first terminal device without a request from the first terminal device, which can reduce signaling overhead.
  • the second terminal device may also send capability information to the first terminal device when requested by the first terminal device, so as to reduce sending of redundant information.
  • the capability query information further includes one or more of the following information: bandwidth information, carrier number information, or separation level information, where the bandwidth information is used to indicate the The second terminal device provides a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the bandwidth information; the carrier number information is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the carrier number information; the separation level The information is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the separation level information.
  • the above one or more items of information included in the capability query information can be collectively referred to as screening information, that is, through screening information, the second terminal device can be ordered to send capability information that meets the screening information to the first terminal device, so that the first terminal device The capability information obtained by the equipment is more valuable.
  • the method further includes: sending the capability information to an access network device.
  • the carrier configured for the second terminal device may be determined by the first terminal device, or may be determined by the access network device. If it is determined by the access network device, the first terminal device may send the capability information of the second terminal device to the access network device, so that the access network device determines which carriers are configured for the second terminal device.
  • determining the N types of carrier configurations includes: receiving third configuration information from an access network device, where the third configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations. If the carrier configured for the second terminal device is determined by the access network device, the access network device can send the third configuration information to the first terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine N types of carrier configurations based on this, and then pass The first configuration information indicates N types of carrier configurations to the second terminal device.
  • the method before determining the N types of carrier configurations, further includes: receiving auxiliary information from the second terminal device, where the auxiliary information is used to indicate K types of carrier configurations, and the K
  • the carriers included in the K carrier configurations are the carriers expected to be configured by the second terminal device, wherein each carrier configuration in the K carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device
  • the carrier and/or, includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and K is a positive integer.
  • the second terminal device may send capability information and/or auxiliary information to the first terminal device. Both the capability information and the auxiliary information can assist the first terminal device or the access network device to configure a suitable carrier for the second terminal device, so as to improve configuration success rate.
  • the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
  • what the first terminal device or the access network device configures for the second terminal device may be the carrier that the second terminal device expects to configure, which makes the configuration result more in line with the needs of the second terminal device. This has a higher probability of acceptance and therefore increases the configuration success rate.
  • the auxiliary information includes frequency information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, or includes indexes of carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
  • the auxiliary information further includes bandwidth information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, where the bandwidth information of the first carrier included in the K carrier configurations is used to indicate the The bandwidth of the first carrier configured by the second terminal device is less than or equal to the bandwidth corresponding to the bandwidth information.
  • the auxiliary information may also indicate the maximum bandwidth of a carrier. If the carrier is to be configured for the second terminal device, the configured bandwidth of the carrier may be less than or equal to the maximum bandwidth of the carrier. In this way, a suitable carrier is configured for the second terminal device, and the parameters of the carrier are also within the acceptance range of the second terminal device, so as to improve the configuration success rate.
  • the K types of carrier configurations include the carrier being used by the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device or the access network device can configure the carrier used by the second terminal device for the second terminal device, then the second terminal device does not need to monitor/receive on the new carrier, but continues to continue on the used carrier It only needs to monitor/receive, which can reduce the power consumption of the second terminal device and simplify the implementation of the second terminal device.
  • the method further includes: sending first indication information to the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate activation of a second carrier, and the second carrier is the The first carrier configuration or carriers in the part of carriers.
  • the amount of data transmitted between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may not be balanced. For example, a large amount of data may be transmitted in certain time periods, while a small amount of data may be transmitted in certain time periods.
  • the embodiment of the present application considers that if the second terminal device always monitors/receives on all the carriers configured for the second terminal device, the power consumption of the second terminal device is relatively high.
  • the first terminal device (or access network device) can dynamically activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier according to the communication between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, so as to ensure that the first terminal device and the second terminal device
  • the two terminal devices can communicate normally, and the power consumption of the terminal devices can also be reduced.
  • the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate activation of the second carrier; or, according to the data to be transmitted Determine to activate the second carrier according to the corresponding relationship between the quantity and the first threshold; or, determine to activate the second carrier according to the first parameter, and the first parameter includes one or more of the following: the first The QoS information of the service between the terminal device and the second terminal device, the configuration of the first carrier or the CBR information of the partial carrier, or the data volume information buffered by the first terminal device interest.
  • the access network device may determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier, or the first terminal device may also determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier.
  • the first terminal device can determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier according to corresponding parameters, or the first terminal device can also determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier according to the amount of data, such as the amount of data to be sent to the second The data volume of the terminal equipment, so that the carrier activation or deactivation can meet the current communication needs.
  • the method further includes: sending first indication information to the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate deactivation of a third carrier, and the third carrier is The first carrier configuration or carriers in the part of carriers.
  • the method further includes: receiving third indication information from the access network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate deactivation of the third carrier; or, according to the to-be-transmitted According to the corresponding relationship between the amount of data and the first threshold, determine to deactivate the third carrier; or, determine to deactivate the third carrier according to the first parameter, where the first parameter includes one or more of the following: The QoS information of the service between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the configuration of the first carrier or the CBR information of the partial carrier, or the data volume information buffered by the first terminal device.
  • the first terminal device when the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier is activated, start or restart a second timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or , when sending information to the second terminal device and/or receiving information from the second terminal device through the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier, start or restart the connection with the fourth carrier
  • the second timer corresponding to the carrier For example, the first terminal device sends the instruction information for instructing to deactivate the third carrier to the second terminal device, but the second UE does not receive the instruction information, then the second terminal device will continue to listen/monitor on the third carrier reception, resulting in waste of power for the second terminal device.
  • the first terminal device and the second terminal device in the embodiment of the present application can maintain a timer for a carrier.
  • a terminal device can maintain a timer for a carrier. Through this timer, even if no indication information is received In a case where the terminal device can also deactivate the corresponding carrier, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • start or Restarting the second timer corresponding to the fourth carrier includes: starting or restarting the second timer when sending the information to the second terminal device or receiving the information from the second terminal device is completed. a second timer; or, starting or restarting the second timer in the first time unit after sending the information to the second terminal device or receiving the information from the second terminal device.
  • the method further includes: deactivating the fourth carrier when the second timer expires. If the second timer expires, no matter whether the first terminal device receives the corresponding indication information, or whether the first terminal device determines that the fourth carrier needs to be deactivated, the first terminal device can deactivate the fourth carrier to reduce the The power consumption of the first terminal equipment is reduced.
  • the method further includes: when the third transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, Start or restart a fifth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or, when the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier and the second terminal device perform a third transmission function , start or restart a fifth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier.
  • the third transfer function includes the first terminal device receiving information from the second terminal device.
  • a terminal device can also maintain two timers for a carrier, and these two timers monitor different transmission functions of the terminal device on the carrier respectively, so that finer-grained control can be realized.
  • the transmission function corresponding to the timer may be deactivated, while the transmission function not corresponding to the timer is not restricted and may continue to be executed. This can not only reduce the power consumption of the terminal equipment, but also reduce the impact on other transmission functions, and improve the carrier utilization rate and communication success rate.
  • the method further includes: when the fifth timer expires, deactivating the third transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier.
  • the method further includes: when a fourth transmission function of the first terminal device on a fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, Start or restart the sixth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or, when the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier and the second terminal device perform a fourth transmission function , start or restart a sixth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier.
  • the fourth transmission function includes the first terminal device sending information to the second terminal device.
  • the method further includes: when the sixth timer expires, deactivating the fourth transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier.
  • a second communication method which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including terminal device functions, or by a chip system (or, chip) or other functional modules, the chip system or functional modules
  • the function of the terminal device can be realized, and the chip system or the functional module is set in the terminal device, for example.
  • the terminal device is, for example, the second terminal device.
  • the method includes: receiving first configuration information from a first terminal device; determining N types of carrier configurations according to the first configuration information, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes The carrier on which the second terminal device sends information, and/or includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and N is a positive integer.
  • the first configuration information includes frequency information of the carrier, or includes an index of the carrier.
  • the method further includes: sending confirmation information to the first terminal device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the second terminal device to accept the first of the N types of carrier configurations.
  • Carrier configuration or instruct the second terminal device to accept part of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration of the N types of carrier configurations; or, send rejection information to the first terminal device, where the rejection information is used to indicate the
  • the second terminal device rejects the N types of carrier configurations; or, sends second configuration information to the first terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the desired carrier configuration of the second terminal device.
  • the method before receiving the first configuration information from the first terminal device, the method further includes: sending capability information of the second terminal device to the first terminal device, the capability The information includes one or more of the following: frequency band information supported by the second terminal device, frequency band combination information supported by the second terminal device, or information on the support capability of the second terminal device for multiple carriers.
  • the method before sending the capability information of the second terminal device to the first terminal device, the method further includes: receiving capability query information from the first terminal device, the The capability query information is used to request the second terminal device to provide capability information.
  • the capability query information further includes one or more of the following information: bandwidth information, carrier number information, or separation level information, where the bandwidth information is used to indicate the The second terminal device provides a frequency band or frequency band combination that can support the bandwidth information; the carrier number information is used to indicate that the second terminal The terminal device provides a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the carrier quantity information; the separation level information is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the separation level information.
  • the method further includes: sending auxiliary information to the first terminal device, where the auxiliary information is used to indicate K types of carrier configurations, and the carriers included in the K types of carrier configurations are all The carrier desired to be configured by the second terminal device, wherein each of the K carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes The carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, K is a positive integer.
  • the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
  • the auxiliary information includes frequency information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, or includes indexes of the carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
  • the auxiliary information further includes bandwidth information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, where the bandwidth information of the first carrier included in the K carrier configurations is used to indicate the The bandwidth of the first carrier configured by the second terminal device is less than or equal to the bandwidth corresponding to the bandwidth information.
  • the K types of carrier configurations include the carrier being used by the second terminal device.
  • the method further includes: receiving first indication information from the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate activation of the second carrier, or to indicate deactivation of the second carrier.
  • the second carrier or the third carrier is a carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier.
  • the method further includes: when the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the part of carriers is activated, starting or restarting the first carrier corresponding to the fourth carrier a timer; and/or, when receiving information from the first terminal device and/or sending information to the first terminal device through the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier, start or Restart the first timer corresponding to the fourth carrier.
  • starting or restarting the first timer corresponding to the fourth carrier including: starting or restarting at the moment when the information is received from the first terminal device or the information is sent to the first terminal device.
  • the first timer or, starting or restarting the first timer in the first time unit after receiving the information from the first terminal device or sending the information to the first terminal device device.
  • the method further includes: deactivating the fourth carrier when the first timer expires.
  • the method further includes: when the first transmission function of the second terminal device on the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, Start or restart the third timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or, when the first terminal device performs the first transmission function through the first carrier configuration or the fourth carrier in the partial carrier , start or restart a third timer corresponding to the fourth carrier.
  • the first transmission function includes the second terminal device sending information to the first terminal device.
  • the method further includes: when the third timer expires, deactivating the first transmission function of the second terminal device on the fourth carrier.
  • the method further includes: when a second transmission function of the second terminal device on a fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, Start or restart a fourth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or, when the first carrier is configured or the fourth carrier in the partial carrier is connected to the When the second terminal device executes the second transmission function, start or restart a fourth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier.
  • the second transmission function includes the second terminal device receiving information from the first terminal device.
  • the method further includes: when the fourth timer expires, deactivating the second transmission function of the second terminal device on the fourth carrier.
  • a third communication method is provided, which can be executed by access network equipment, or by other equipment including access network equipment functions, or by a chip system (or, chip) or other functional modules, the chip The system or functional module can realize the function of the access network equipment, and the chip system or functional module is set in the access network equipment, for example.
  • the access network device is, for example, a base station.
  • the method includes: determining N types of carrier configurations, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier for the second terminal device
  • the terminal device sends information carriers to the first terminal device, where N is a positive integer; and sends third configuration information to the first terminal device, where the third configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
  • the third configuration information includes frequency information of the carrier, or includes an index of the carrier.
  • the method further includes: receiving confirmation information from the first terminal device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the second terminal device to accept the first of the N types of carrier configurations.
  • Carrier configuration or instructing the second terminal device to accept part of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration of the N types of carrier configurations; or, receiving rejection information from the first terminal device, where the rejection information is used to indicate the The second terminal device rejects the N types of carrier configurations; or, receiving second configuration information from the first terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the desired carrier configuration of the second terminal device.
  • the method before determining the N types of carrier configurations, further includes: receiving capability information from the first terminal device, where the capability information includes one or more of the following: the first The frequency band information supported by the second terminal device, the frequency band combination information supported by the second terminal device, or the support capability information of the second terminal device for multiple carriers.
  • the method before determining the N types of carrier configurations, further includes: receiving auxiliary information of the second terminal device from the first terminal device, where the auxiliary information is used to indicate K Carrier configurations, the carriers included in the K carrier configurations are the carriers expected to be configured by the second terminal device, wherein each carrier configuration in the K carrier configurations includes The carrier for the second terminal device to send information, and/or, includes a carrier for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and K is a positive integer.
  • the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
  • the auxiliary information includes frequency information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, or includes indexes of carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
  • the auxiliary information further includes bandwidth information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, where the bandwidth information of the first carrier included in the K carrier configurations is used to indicate the The bandwidth of the first carrier configured by the second terminal device is less than or equal to the bandwidth corresponding to the bandwidth information.
  • the method further includes: determining to activate a second carrier according to a first parameter, where the second carrier is a carrier in the configuration of the first carrier or a carrier in the partial carrier, and the second carrier A parameter includes one or more of the following: QoS information of services between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the configuration of the first carrier, or The CBR information of the part of the carrier, or the data volume information buffered by the first terminal device; sending second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate activation of the second carrier .
  • the method further includes: determining to deactivate a third carrier according to a first parameter, where the third carrier is a carrier in the configuration of the first carrier or in the partial carrier, the The first parameter includes one or more of the following: QoS information of services between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, configuration of the first carrier or CBR information of the partial carrier, or, the The data volume information cached by the first terminal device; and sending second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to instruct deactivation of the third carrier.
  • a communication device may be the first terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
  • the communication device has the function of the above-mentioned first terminal device.
  • the communication device is, for example, the first terminal device, or a functional module in the first terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system (or, chip), and the like.
  • the communication device may be the second terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
  • the communication device has the function of the above-mentioned second terminal device.
  • the communication device is, for example, the second terminal device, or a functional module in the second terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system (or, chip), and the like.
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit (also called a processing module sometimes) and a transceiver unit (also called a transceiver module sometimes).
  • the transceiver unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function.
  • the sending unit sometimes also called the sending module.
  • the receiving unit sometimes also called receiving module.
  • the sending unit and the receiving unit can be the same functional module, which is called the transceiver unit, and this functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or, the sending unit and the receiving unit can be different functional modules, and the transceiver unit is for these A general term for functional modules.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine N types of carrier configurations, and the N types of carrier configurations Each carrier configuration includes a carrier used for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and N is a positive integer ;
  • the transceiving unit (or, the sending unit) is configured to send first configuration information to the second terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
  • the transceiver unit (or, the receiving unit) is configured to receive from the first terminal The device receives first configuration information; the processing unit is configured to determine N types of carrier configurations according to the first configuration information, and each carrier configuration in the N types of carrier configurations includes a The carrier for the second terminal device to send information, and/or, includes a carrier for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and N is a positive integer.
  • the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also referred to as a storage module), and the processing unit is used to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program or An instruction to enable the communication device to execute the function of the first terminal device or the second terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
  • a storage unit sometimes also referred to as a storage module
  • a communication device may be the access network device described in any one of the above first to third aspects.
  • the communication device has the functions of the above-mentioned access network equipment.
  • the communication device is, for example, an access network device, or a functional module in the access network device, such as a baseband device or a chip system (or chip).
  • the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit (sometimes also called a processing module) and a transceiver unit (sometimes also called a transceiver module).
  • a processing unit sometimes also called a processing module
  • transceiver unit sometimes also called a transceiver module
  • the processing unit is configured to determine N types of carrier configurations, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or, Including a carrier for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, N is a positive integer; the transceiver unit (or, the receiving unit) is used to send third configuration information to the first terminal device, The third configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
  • the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also referred to as a storage module), and the processing unit is used to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program or An instruction to enable the communication device to perform the function of the access network device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
  • a storage unit sometimes also referred to as a storage module
  • a sixth aspect provides a communication system, including the communication device described in the fourth aspect and the communication device described in the fifth aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer programs or instructions, and when executed, the first terminal device, the second terminal device, or the interface in the above-mentioned aspects The method performed by the network access device is implemented.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which enables the methods described in the above aspects to be implemented when it is run on a computer.
  • a chip system or chip including a processor and an interface, and the processor is configured to call and execute instructions from the interface, so that the chip system implements the methods in the above aspects.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 are flowcharts of two communication methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of another device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • a terminal device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, which can be a fixed device, a mobile device, a handheld device (such as a mobile phone), a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wireless device built into the above-mentioned devices (such as a communication module, a modem, or system-on-a-chip, etc.).
  • the terminal device is used to connect people, objects, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, including but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D), car-to-everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC), internet of things (IoT), virtual reality (VR) , augmented reality (augmented reality, AR), industrial control (industrial control), driverless (self driving), telemedicine (remote medical), smart grid (smart grid), smart furniture, Terminal equipment for smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, drones, robots and other scenarios.
  • cellular communication device-to-device communication
  • D2D device-to-device, D2D
  • car-to-everything vehicle to everything
  • V2X machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT internet of things
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • the terminal device may sometimes be called a UE, terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication device, or user device, among others.
  • the terminal device is taken as an example for description.
  • the first UE mentioned below can be replaced by the first terminal device
  • the second UE mentioned below can be replaced by the second terminal device. .
  • the network devices in this embodiment of the present application may include, for example, access network devices and/or core network devices.
  • the access network device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, and is used for communicating with the terminal device.
  • the access network equipment includes but is not limited to a base station (base transceiver station (BTS), Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a third generation 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) subsequent evolution base station, wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) system access node, wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, etc.
  • BTS base transceiver station
  • TRP transmission reception point
  • 3GPP third generation 3rd generation partnership project
  • the base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, and the like. Multiple base stations can support networks of the same access technology or networks of different access technologies.
  • a base station may contain one or more co-sited or non-co-sited transmission and reception points.
  • the access network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), and/or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario.
  • the access network device may also be a server or the like.
  • a network device in a vehicle to everything (V2X) technology may be a road side unit (RSU).
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • RSU road side unit
  • the base station can communicate with the terminal equipment, and can also communicate with the terminal equipment through the relay station.
  • a terminal device can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
  • the core network equipment is used to implement functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and charging.
  • the names of devices implementing core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the core network equipment includes: access and mobility management function (access and mobility management function, AMF), session management function (session management function, SMF), Policy control function (policy control function, PCF) or user plane function (user plane function, UPF), etc.
  • the communication device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the network device as an example for realizing the function of the network device.
  • 5G proximity based services-enabled (5G ProSe-enabled) UE is a UE that supports 5G ProSe requirements and related procedures.
  • 5G ProSe direct communication is communication between two or more adjacent 5G ProSe-enabled UEs.
  • the transmission of the user plane uses new radio (NR) technology, and the communication path between two ProSe-enabled UEs does not traverse any network nodes.
  • NR new radio
  • V2X communication (communication), using Uu interface and/or PC5 reference point (or, PC5 interface) to support communication of V2X service.
  • V2X services are realized through various types of V2X applications, such as vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P), vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I) ) or vehicle-to-network (V2N), etc.
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • V2P vehicle-to-pedestrian
  • V2I vehicle-to-infrastructure
  • V2N vehicle-to-network
  • the PC5 reference point (or, PC5 interface) is a reference point (or, interface) between UEs.
  • the Uu reference point (or Uu interface) is the connection between the UE and the radio access network (for example, next generation (next generation, NG)-radio access network (radio access network, RAN), or E-UTRAN, etc.) Reference point (or, interface).
  • the radio access network for example, next generation (next generation, NG)-radio access network (radio access network, RAN), or E-UTRAN, etc.
  • Reference point or, interface
  • NR SL communication is an access stratum (AS) function that realizes V2X communication and 5G ProSe direct communication between two or more adjacent UEs.
  • NR sidelink communication applies NR technology, but the communication path between UEs does not traverse any network nodes.
  • SL transmission is between a pair of source (source) and target (destination).
  • the source can be identified by the source layer 2 ID (source layer-2ID), and the destination can be identified by the destination layer 2 ID (destination layer-2ID).
  • the source layer-2ID is used to identify the data sender (sender) UE in the SL communication
  • the destination layer-2ID is used to identify the data target (target) UE or the data receiver UE in the SL communication.
  • the sender refers to the source of SL communication (or a media access control (media access control, MAC) protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU)
  • the receiver refers to SL communication (or a MAC PDU) the destination.
  • the UE described below may refer to a UE using a Layer-2 ID, and the UE uses the Layer-2 ID in SL communication.
  • SL communication includes a unicast communication mode.
  • a PC5-radio resource control (RRC) connection (connection) is a logical connection between a source and destination pair (the source and destination pair). The connection is considered to be established after the corresponding PC5 unicast link is established, and the PC5-RRC connection and the PC5 unicast link may correspond one-to-one.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • a UE can establish a PC5-RRC connection with one or more UEs, and one of the PC5-RRC connections is used for a pair of source Layer-2ID and destination Layer-2ID.
  • nouns for the number of nouns, unless otherwise specified, it means “singular noun or plural noun", that is, “one or more". “At least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more. "And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character “/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or” relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. “At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • At least one item (piece) of a, b, or c means: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
  • the ordinal numerals such as “first” and “second” mentioned in this embodiment of the application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, content, order, timing, priority, or importance of multiple objects.
  • the first information and the second information may be the same information or different information, and this name does not indicate the content, amount of information, priority or importance of the two information. different.
  • the numbering of the steps in the various embodiments introduced in this application is only for distinguishing different steps, and is not used to limit the order of the steps. For example, S201 may occur before S202, or may occur after S202, or may occur simultaneously with S202.
  • the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to D2D scenarios, such as new radio (new radio, NR)-D2D scenarios, etc., or can be applied to vehicle to everything (V2X) scenarios, such as NR-V2X scenarios, etc. .
  • D2D scenarios such as new radio (new radio, NR)-D2D scenarios, etc.
  • V2X vehicle to everything
  • NR-V2X scenarios NR-V2X scenarios, etc.
  • it can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles, such as V2X, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), etc., or can be used in fields such as intelligent driving, assisted driving, or intelligent networked vehicles.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 1 includes UE1 and UE2.
  • UE1 can send data to UE2
  • UE2 is the sending end
  • UE2 is the receiving end
  • UE2 is the sending end
  • UE1 is the receiving end
  • Both UE1 and UE2 in FIG. 1 take a mobile phone as an example, and are not limited to this in practice.
  • the method provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • the drawings corresponding to various embodiments of the present application all optional steps are indicated by dotted lines.
  • the various embodiments of the application The provided methods can all be applied to the scenario shown in FIG. 1.
  • the first UE involved in each embodiment of the present application may be UE1 in FIG. 1; the second UE involved in each embodiment of the present application, It may be UE2 in FIG. 1 .
  • Various embodiments of the present application are applicable to a single carrier scenario, that is, one carrier is configured for one UE.
  • various embodiments of the present application may also be applicable to a multi-carrier scenario, that is, multiple carriers may be configured for a UE, for example, the UE may support side link carrier aggregation, thereby achieving a higher data transmission rate.
  • the information transmitted between the first UE and the second UE may be information under the 3rd generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) protocol, such as side line information (or It may also be information under other communication protocols, such as wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) information or Bluetooth information.
  • 3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • the carrier described in each embodiment of the present application may be a carrier used for communication between UEs, and the carrier corresponds to a communication protocol applicable to the first UE and the second UE.
  • the information transmitted between the first UE and the second UE is sidelink information, and the carrier may also be called a sidelink carrier or a sidechain carrier.
  • the transmission of sidelink information between the first UE and the second UE is mainly taken as an example.
  • FIG. 2 is a flow chart of the first communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the first UE determines N types of carrier configurations, where N is a positive integer.
  • Each of the N carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first UE to send information to the second UE, and/or includes a carrier for the second UE to send information to the first UE.
  • the first carrier configuration may include M carriers
  • the M carriers may include carriers used for the first UE to send information to the second UE ( Or described as a carrier used for the second UE to receive information from the first UE), and/or, including a carrier used for the second UE to send information to the first UE (or described as, used for the first UE to receive information from the carrier of the information of the second UE).
  • M is a positive integer.
  • the N types of carrier configurations include other carrier configurations in addition to the first carrier configuration, for example, each of the N types of carrier configurations can be configured as a carrier for the first UE to send information to the second UE , and/or a carrier used for the second UE to send information to the first UE.
  • the carriers included in the different carrier configurations in the N carrier configurations may be different, and the carrier difference here may be reflected in one or more of the following: the number of carriers is different, the purpose of the carriers is different, or the specific carrier is different (or the frequency of the carrier different).
  • carrier configuration 1 for example, carrier configuration 1 is the first carrier configuration
  • carrier configuration 2 includes Q carriers
  • M is not equal to Q, which indicates that the two carrier configurations include different numbers of carriers.
  • carrier configuration 1 includes M carriers
  • carrier configuration 1 includes M carriers
  • carrier configuration 2 also includes M carriers
  • carrier 1 is included in the M carriers included in carrier configuration 1
  • carrier 1 is not included in the M carriers included in carrier configuration 2
  • the N types of carrier configurations may be determined by the first UE itself.
  • the first UE may determine N carrier configurations according to the carrier used by the first UE.
  • the N types of carrier configurations may also be determined by the first access network device, and the first access network device is the serving access network device of the first UE.
  • the first access network device may send third configuration information to the first UE, where the third configuration information may indicate N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first UE determines the N types of carrier configurations. place.
  • the first UE may or may not accept the carrier configuration indicated by the first access network device to the first UE.
  • the third configuration information indicates at least one carrier configuration. If the first UE accepts all carrier configurations, then all carrier configurations can be configured for the second UE.
  • at least one carrier configuration is N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first UE may not accept some or all of the carrier configurations in at least one carrier configuration, for example, the capabilities of the first UE cannot support working on the carriers included in the part or all of the carrier configurations. If the first UE does not accept the part or all of the carrier configurations, the first UE may send information indicating configuration failure to the first access network device. After receiving the information, the first access network device may re-indicate the new carrier configuration to the first UE until the first UE accepts it, or the first access network device may not re-indicate the new carrier configuration to the first UE configuration, but instructs the first UE to configure itself.
  • the first UE when the first UE is in the RRC inactive (inactive) state or the RRC idle (idle) state, the first UE can determine N types of carrier configurations by itself; or, when the first UE is in the RRC connected (connected) state, the first UE The N types of carrier configurations may be determined by itself, or the first access network device may determine the N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first UE sends the first configuration information to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives the first configuration information from the first UE.
  • the first configuration information may indicate N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first configuration information may be included in an RRC reconfiguration sidelink (RRC reconfiguration sidelink) message, or may also be included in other messages transmitted between the first UE and the second UE.
  • RRC reconfiguration sidelink RRC reconfiguration sidelink
  • carrier configuration and activation may be the same operation, that is, configuring a carrier for the second UE is equivalent to activating the carrier for the second UE, then the first Configuration information can also be regarded as activation information, which is used to activate N types of carrier configurations.
  • configuring a carrier is a different operation from activating a carrier.
  • the first UE also needs to activate the carrier for the second UE, so that the second UE can use the carrier.
  • the first configuration information may include information for configuring N types of carrier configurations (for example, N pieces of information to be introduced below), and further include information for activating N types of carrier configurations, so that the information used to configure N types of carrier configurations
  • the information is equivalent to configuring N types of carrier configurations for the second UE, and the information for activating N types of carrier configurations is equivalent to activating N types of carrier configurations for the second UE, or activating the carriers included in the N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first configuration information may include information for configuring N types of carrier configurations (for example, N pieces of information to be introduced below), but does not include information for activating N types of carrier configurations, and the first UE may additionally send information to the second The UE sends information for activating at least one of the N carrier configurations, for example, after the first UE receives an acknowledgment message from the second UE (the acknowledgment message will be introduced later), it can send the information to the second UE Sending information for activating the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE.
  • N types of carrier configurations for example, N pieces of information to be introduced below
  • the first UE may additionally send information to the second
  • the UE sends information for activating at least one of the N carrier configurations, for example, after the first UE receives an acknowledgment message from the second UE (the acknowledgment message will be introduced later), it can send the information to the second UE Sending information for activating the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE.
  • activating a carrier for the UE may be implemented as that the UE starts to use the carrier, for example, the UE starts to communicate with other UEs on the carrier, including monitoring/receiving on the carrier.
  • deactivating a carrier for the UE may be achieved by the UE stopping using the carrier, for example, the UE stops communicating on the carrier, or all communication activities of the UE do not use the carrier, or the UE is in No more listening/receiving etc. on this carrier.
  • the fact that the UE monitors/receives on a certain carrier may refer to monitoring/receiving the SCI on the carrier.
  • the SCI may be a first-level SCI, or a second-level SCI, or a first-level SCI and a second-level SCI.
  • activating a carrier for the UE may also be implemented as that the UE starts to use a certain transmission function on the carrier, and the transmission function may be all or part of the transmission function of the UE.
  • deactivating a carrier for the UE may be implemented as that the UE stops using the transmission function on the carrier, but if the transmission function is part of the transmission function of the UE, the UE may also use the transmission function on the carrier.
  • Other transmission functions of the UE Regarding these contents, the A more detailed introduction will be made in the next embodiment, and details will not be repeated here.
  • the first configuration information may include information of all carriers included in the N types of carrier configurations, thereby indicating the N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first configuration information includes N pieces of information, and the N pieces of information may indicate N types of carrier configurations, and one piece of information indicates one type of carrier configuration.
  • one of the N pieces of information is the first information, and the first information may indicate the first carrier configuration.
  • the first carrier configuration includes M carriers, and the first information may include information about the M carriers.
  • the information of a carrier may include frequency information of the carrier, then the first information may include frequency information of M carriers.
  • a carrier may include multiple resource blocks (resource blocks, RBs), and the frequency of the carrier may be represented by the frequency of one of the RBs included in the carrier, for example, by the absolute frequency of the RB.
  • the RB is, for example, the reference RB included in the carrier, for example, the reference RB is the RB located in the middle frequency domain among the RBs included in the carrier, or the RB with the lowest frequency among the RBs included in the carrier, or the RB of the carrier The RB with the highest frequency among the included RBs, etc.
  • the information of a carrier may also include bandwidth information of the carrier.
  • the information of a carrier includes frequency information of the carrier, and may optionally include bandwidth information of the carrier.
  • the first information may include frequency information of the M carriers, and optionally, bandwidth information of the M carriers.
  • the information of a carrier may not include the frequency information of the carrier, but include the index of the carrier, then the first information may include the indexes of the M carriers.
  • the carrier index has a smaller amount of information and occupies less resources, which is beneficial to save signaling overhead.
  • the corresponding relationship between the index of the carrier and the identifier of the carrier (for example, the frequency of the reference RB of the carrier can be regarded as the identifier of the carrier, or the serial number of a carrier in the frequency band can be regarded as the identifier of the carrier, etc.), can be predicted
  • the configuration is configured in the first UE and the second UE, and the pre-configured corresponding relationships in the first UE and the second UE may be completely the same, or may also be partially the same.
  • the corresponding relationship between the index of a carrier and the identifier of the carrier is regarded as a sub-relationship, and a corresponding relationship may include one or more sub-relationships.
  • the exact sameness here means that the sub-relationships included in the pre-configured correspondence in the first UE are completely the same as the sub-relationships included in the pre-configured correspondence in the first UE;
  • the sub-relations included in the pre-configured correspondence are partly the same as the sub-relations included in the pre-configured correspondence in the first UE.
  • the pre-configured correspondence in the first UE includes sub-relations 1 to 3
  • the internally preconfigured corresponding relationship includes sub-relationship 2 to sub-relationship 6.
  • the corresponding relationship between the index of the carrier and the identifier of the carrier may also be included in other information.
  • the first UE may receive fourth information from the first access network device, where the fourth information may include a correspondence between a carrier identifier and a carrier index, and the first UE may determine the carrier index according to the fourth information.
  • the fourth information may include identifiers of carriers used by UEs covered by the first access network device (may include carriers used for these UEs to receive information, and/or carriers used for these UEs to send information) and the IDs of these carriers. Correspondence between indexes.
  • the second UE may receive fifth information from the second access network device, where the fifth information may include a correspondence between carrier identifiers and carrier indexes, and the second UE may determine the carrier indexes according to the fifth information.
  • the fifth information may include identifiers of carriers used by UEs covered by the second access network device (may include carriers used for these UEs to receive information, and/or carriers used for these UEs to send information) and the IDs of these carriers. Correspondence between indexes.
  • the content included in the fourth information and the content included in the fifth information may be completely the same, or may be partly the same, for which reference may be made to the introduction above.
  • the first access network device is the serving access network device of the first UE
  • the second access network device is the serving access network device of the second UE
  • the first access network device and the second access network device may It is the same access network device, or may be different access network devices.
  • the information of a carrier may also include bandwidth information of the carrier.
  • the information of a carrier includes the index of the carrier, and optionally includes the bandwidth information of the carrier.
  • the first information may include indexes of M carriers, optionally , also includes bandwidth information of the M carriers.
  • the N carrier configurations indicated by the first UE may be used by the second UE to receive information from the first UE, and/or used by the second UE to send information to the first UE.
  • this embodiment of the present application may further include S203: the second UE sends capability information to the first UE, and accordingly, The first UE receives capability information from the second UE.
  • the capability information is, for example, included in a UE capability information sidelink (UE capability information sidelink) message, or included in other messages. For example, S203 occurs before S201.
  • the capability information is the capability information of the second UE, and the capability information may be the capability information sent by the second UE to the first UE for the first time, or it may be the capability information sent by the second UE to the first UE when the capability of the second UE changes.
  • the updated capability information sent For example, after establishing a PC5 unicast connection with the first UE, the second UE may send current capability information of the second UE to the first UE. Next, the second UE may also perform SL communication with other UEs except the first UE, such as PC5 unicast communication, PC5 multicast communication or PC5 broadcast communication, etc.
  • These communication processes may cause the second UE to occupy or release some frequency band, or change the capability of the second UE to support multiple carriers, which may cause the capability of the second UE to change. If the capability of the second UE changes, the second UE may send updated capability information to the first UE, so that the first UE can determine N types of carrier configurations according to the latest capability information of the second UE.
  • the first UE may use the capability information of the second UE as a reference factor when determining N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first UE may send the capability information to the first access network device for the first access network device to The capability information is used as a reference factor at the time of determining N types of carrier configurations.
  • the capability information includes, for example, the receiving capability information of the second UE, and/or includes the transmitting capability information of the second UE; or, the transmitting capability information of the second UE is the same as the receiving capability information, then the capability information includes the transmitting Capability information or receiving capability information is sufficient.
  • the capability information may include one or more of the following: information about frequency bands supported by the second UE, information about frequency band combinations supported by the second UE, or information about the ability of the second UE to support multiple carriers. Wherein, one frequency band combination may include at least two frequency bands.
  • the support capability information of the second UE for multiple carriers is taken as an example of the support capability information of the second UE for sidelink multiple carriers.
  • the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers may include sidelink carrier aggregation bandwidth levels supported by the second UE, and/or include frequency separation levels for in-band non-continuous carrier aggregation supported by the second UE.
  • the sidelink carrier aggregation bandwidth level supported by the second UE may include the number of contiguous component carriers supported by the second UE participating in sidelink carrier aggregation, and/or the sidelink aggregation channel supported by the second UE Bandwidth (aggregated channel bandwidth).
  • the in-band discontinuous carrier aggregation frequency separation level supported by the second UE may indicate the maximum frequency separation supported by the second UE, that is, the maximum frequency separation between adjacent carriers among carriers participating in carrier aggregation.
  • the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers is related to the frequency band information supported by the second UE, then the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers may include Support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers in one or more frequency bands.
  • the second UEs respectively have support capabilities for sidelink multi-carriers, and the sidelink multi-carrier support capabilities corresponding to different frequency bands are the same or different.
  • the second UE supports frequency band 1 and frequency band 2.
  • frequency band 1 the number of continuous component carriers supported by the second UE is 2, the sidelink aggregation channel bandwidth supported by the second UE is A 1 , and the maximum frequency supported by the second UE is The interval is B 1 .
  • frequency band 2 the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE is 3
  • the bandwidth of the sidelink aggregation channel supported by the second UE is A 2
  • the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE is B 2 .
  • a 1 and A 2 may or may not be equal; B 1 and B 2 may or may not be equal.
  • the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers is related to the frequency band combination information supported by the second UE, then the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers may include one Or support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers under a combination of multiple frequency bands.
  • the second UEs respectively have support capabilities for sidelink multi-carriers, and the sidelink multi-carrier support capabilities corresponding to different frequency band combinations are the same or different.
  • the second UE supports frequency band combination 1 and frequency band combination 2, wherein frequency band combination 1 includes frequency band 1 and frequency band 2, and frequency band combination 2 includes frequency band 1 and frequency band 3.
  • frequency band combination 1 the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE is 5, the bandwidth of the sidelink aggregation channel supported by the second UE is A 3 , and the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE is B 3 .
  • the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE is 3
  • the sidelink aggregation channel bandwidth supported by the second UE is A 4
  • the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE is B 4 .
  • a 3 and A 4 may or may not be equal; B 3 and B 4 may or may not be equal.
  • the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers may also include Information about the support capability of sidelink multi-carriers under the frequency bands included in one or more frequency band combinations will not be repeated here.
  • the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers has nothing to do with the frequency band or frequency band combination supported by the second UE. If they are the same, then the capability information only needs to include the capability information of the second UE supporting the sidelink multi-carrier.
  • the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers includes, the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE is 4, the sidelink aggregation channel bandwidth supported by the second UE is A 5 , and the maximum frequency supported by the second UE is The interval is B 5 .
  • the second UE may actively send the capability information to the first UE, or the second UE may send the capability information to the first UE at the request of the first UE.
  • this embodiment of the present application further includes S204: the first UE sends capability query information to the second UE, and accordingly, the second UE receives capability query information from the first UE, and the capability query information may request the second UE to provide capability information.
  • the capability inquiry information is, for example, included in a UE capability inquiry sidelink (UE capability enquiry sidelink) message, or included in other messages. For example, S204 occurs before S203. After receiving the capability inquiry information, the second UE may send the capability information to the first UE.
  • the capability query information further includes one or more of the following information: bandwidth information (for example, referred to as first bandwidth information), carrier number information, or separation level information.
  • bandwidth information for example, referred to as first bandwidth information
  • carrier number information for example, referred to as carrier number information
  • separation level information for example, the bandwidth information is information A, Information on the number of carriers is information B, and separation level information is information C.
  • the first UE may determine one or more of the above information included in the capability inquiry information; or, if N types of carrier configurations are determined by the first access network device, the capability The query information may be sent by the first access network device to the first UE, and then sent by the first UE to the second UE, then one or more items of information above may be determined by the first access network device; or, if the first The access network device determines N types of carrier configurations, and the capability query information can also be sent by the first UE to the second UE, and the first UE can then send the capability information from the second UE to the first access network device, as above One or more pieces of information of may be determined by the first UE.
  • the first bandwidth information may instruct the second UE to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the first bandwidth information.
  • the first bandwidth information may indicate the first bandwidth, which is equivalent to indicating to the second UE that each frequency band in the frequency bands indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first bandwidth;
  • Each frequency band included in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent should be able to support the first bandwidth; or, each frequency band combination in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first bandwidth.
  • one frequency band supports the first bandwidth, it may be realized that the maximum bandwidth of the frequency band is greater than or equal to the first bandwidth.
  • a band combination supports the first bandwidth, It may be realized that the total maximum bandwidth of all frequency bands included in the frequency band combination is greater than or equal to the first bandwidth.
  • the first bandwidth information may be frequency information of the first bandwidth, or an index of the first bandwidth, or other information that can be used to determine the first bandwidth.
  • the information on the number of carriers may instruct the second UE to provide a frequency band or combination of frequency bands capable of supporting the information on the number of carriers.
  • the carrier number information indicates the first number, which is equivalent to indicating the second UE, and each frequency band in the frequency bands indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first number; or, the second UE sends Each frequency band included in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information of the second UE shall be able to support the first quantity; or, each frequency band combination in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE shall be able to support the first quantity.
  • one frequency band supports the first number
  • the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE under the frequency band is less than or equal to the first number.
  • Supporting the first number by a frequency band combination may be implemented as that the total number of continuous component carriers supported by the second UE under all carriers included in the frequency band combination is less than or equal to the first number.
  • the separation level information may instruct the second UE to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the separation level information.
  • the separation level information indicates the first frequency interval, which is equivalent to indicating the second UE, and each frequency band in the frequency bands indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first frequency interval; or, the second UE
  • Each frequency band included in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent should be able to support the first frequency interval; or, each frequency band combination in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first frequency interval. frequency interval. Where one frequency band supports the first frequency interval, it may be realized that the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE in the frequency band is smaller than or equal to the first frequency interval.
  • a frequency band combination supporting the first number may be realized in that the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE in all frequency bands included in the frequency band combination is less than or equal to the first frequency interval.
  • a frequency band combination includes multiple frequency bands, and the second UE can support the maximum frequency interval in each frequency band, and the frequency interval with the largest or smallest value among these maximum frequency intervals can be considered as the second UE in the frequency band. The maximum frequency interval supported under the combination.
  • the second UE can be made to perform corresponding screening, so that the capability information sent by the second UE can meet the requirements of the first UE.
  • the second UE may send capability information to the first UE.
  • the second UE may not send capability information to the first UE, but may send auxiliary information to the first UE, then S203 may be replaced by: the second UE sends auxiliary information to the first UE, and correspondingly, the first UE receives Assistance information from the second UE.
  • the second UE may send the capability information and auxiliary information to the first UE, then S203 may be replaced by: the second UE sends the capability information and auxiliary information to the first UE, and correspondingly, the first UE receives the capability information from the second UE Information and Supporting Information.
  • S203 in FIG. 2 is that the second UE sends capability information and/or auxiliary information to the first UE.
  • the auxiliary information may also be used to assist the first UE (or the first access network device) in determining N types of carrier configurations.
  • the auxiliary information may also be called side chain multi-carrier auxiliary information and the like.
  • the auxiliary information it may be actively sent by the second UE to the first UE without a request from the first UE; or it may be requested by the first UE, for example, the first UE may request capability information and/or auxiliary information through S204 .
  • the auxiliary information may indicate K types of carrier configurations, where K is a positive integer.
  • the K types of carrier configurations are carrier configurations desired by the second UE, or desired by the second UE, or preferred by the second UE, or preferred by the second UE.
  • K carrier configurations are desired carrier configurations of the second UE as an example.
  • the K carrier configurations may include carriers used for the first UE to send information to the second UE, and/or include carriers used for the second UE to send information to the first UE.
  • one of the K carrier configurations may be referred to as a second carrier configuration
  • the second carrier configuration may include P carriers, and the P carriers are the carriers desired to be configured by the second UE, or the carriers desired by the second UE.
  • the configured carrier is either the carrier that the second UE tends to configure, or the carrier that the second UE considers to be preferentially configured.
  • the P carriers are the carriers expected to be configured by the second UE. These P carriers may include a carrier used for the first UE to send information to the second UE (or described as, a carrier used for the second UE to receive information from the first UE), and/or include a carrier used for the second UE A carrier for sending information to the first UE (or described as, a carrier for the first UE to receive information from the second UE).
  • P is a positive integer.
  • the K carrier configurations include other carrier configurations in addition to the second carrier configuration.
  • each carrier configuration in the K carrier configurations may include carriers of the second UE desired carrier configuration. These carriers can be used for The first UE sends information to the second UE, and/or the second UE sends information to the first UE.
  • Different carrier configurations among the K carrier configurations may include different carriers, for which reference may be made to the introduction of N carrier configurations in S201.
  • the first UE After the first UE receives the auxiliary information, it can use the auxiliary information as a reference factor when determining the N types of carrier configurations (or, if the first UE receives the auxiliary information and capability information from the second UE, it can determine the N types of carrier configurations During configuration, the capability information and/or the auxiliary information may be used as reference factors).
  • the first UE may send the auxiliary information to the first access network device for the first access network device to
  • the auxiliary information is used as a reference factor when determining the N types of carrier configurations (or, if the first access network device receives the auxiliary information and capability information from the first UE, when determining the N types of carrier configurations, the capability information and /or this auxiliary information as a reference factor).
  • the N types of carrier configurations are the same as the K types of carrier configurations, which means that the N types of carrier configurations are the same as the K types of carrier configurations; or, some of the N types of carrier configurations are the same as the K types of carrier configurations, and the rest The carrier configuration is different from the K carrier configurations.
  • the N1 carrier configurations in the N carrier configurations are the same as the N1 carrier configurations in the K carrier configurations, and the N carrier configurations also include N2 carrier configurations, which are different from the K carrier configurations. All carrier configurations in the carrier configurations are different; or, the N carrier configurations are different from the K carrier configurations, which means that any carrier configuration in the N carrier configurations is different from the K carrier configurations.
  • the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are a subset of the carriers included in the K carrier configurations, so that the carriers configured for the second UE are as far as possible the carriers expected by the second UE.
  • N carrier configurations include carrier 1 to carrier 4
  • K carrier configurations include carrier 1 to carrier 5.
  • the carriers included in the K carrier configurations may include the carrier being used by the second UE.
  • the K carrier configurations include a third carrier, and the third carrier is a carrier being used by the second UE.
  • the second UE is communicating with one or more other UEs except the first UE, and the communication manner includes, for example, one or more of PC5 unicast communication, PC5 multicast communication, or PC5 broadcast communication.
  • the second UE may use one or more carriers, and the second UE may include part or all of the one or more carriers in the K carrier configurations.
  • the carriers configured by the first UE for the second UE according to the assistance information include the carriers being used by the second UE, because the second UE is using these carriers, the second UE has already monitored/received on these carriers, if The first UE configures the second UE to continue to use these carriers, then the second UE does not need to monitor/receive on the new carrier, but continues to monitor/receive on the used carrier, which can save the work of the second UE consumption.
  • the second UE may monitor the congestion level of the carrier, for example, the second UE determines the busyness of the carrier through a channel busy ratio (channel busy ratio, CBR). For example, if the CBR of a certain carrier being used by the second UE is high, indicating that the carrier is relatively busy, the second UE may not add the carrier to the K carrier configurations; if the CBR of a certain carrier being used by the second UE is A lower CBR indicates that the carrier is relatively idle, and the second UE may add the carrier to one or more carrier configurations in the K carrier configurations. In this way, the power consumption of the second UE can be saved, and the congestion degree of the carrier can also be considered to reduce collisions.
  • CBR channel busy ratio
  • the auxiliary information indicates K types of carrier configurations.
  • an indication manner is that the auxiliary information includes information of all carriers included in the K types of carrier configurations.
  • the auxiliary information may include K pieces of information, and the K pieces of information may indicate K types of carriers configuration, one of which indicates a carrier configuration.
  • one of the K pieces of information is the second information, and the second information may indicate the second carrier configuration.
  • the second carrier configuration includes P carriers
  • the second information may include information on the P carriers.
  • information of a carrier may include frequency information of the carrier or an index of the carrier.
  • the carrier information may also include bandwidth information of the carrier.
  • content included in the carrier information refer to the introduction of S202.
  • the bandwidth information is, for example, the maximum bandwidth of the carrier.
  • the second information includes bandwidth information of the first carrier, and the bandwidth indicated by the bandwidth information may be called the second bandwidth.
  • the second bandwidth may be the maximum bandwidth of the first carrier, which can be understood as, if the first UE (or the first access network device) is to configure the first carrier for the second UE, that is, if the N carrier configurations Any one or more carrier configurations include the first carrier, then the bandwidth of the first carrier configured by the first UE (or the first access network device) may be less than or equal to the second bandwidth.
  • the second UE sends confirmation information to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the confirmation information from the second UE. If the second UE accepts the first configuration information, the second UE may send confirmation information to the first UE, to instruct the second UE to accept the first configuration information, or to instruct the second UE to accept N kinds of carrier configurations.
  • the confirmation information may also be referred to as success information or acceptance information, and the confirmation information is used as an example in this document.
  • the first configuration information indicates a kind of carrier configuration (for example, the first carrier configuration)
  • the second UE may send confirmation information to the first UE .
  • the second UE completely accepts the first carrier configuration, which means that the second UE accepts all carriers configured by the first carrier configuration.
  • the second UE may determine whether to accept a carrier according to various factors. For example, the second UE may determine whether the second UE supports a carrier according to one or more factors in the capability of the second UE, the number of carriers supported by the second UE, or the degree of carrier congestion.
  • the first configuration information indicates multiple carrier configurations. Then, if the second UE fully accepts one carrier configuration among the N carrier configurations, the second UE may send confirmation information to the first UE. The second UE completely accepts a carrier configuration, which means that the second UE accepts all carriers configured by the carrier configuration. Optionally, if the second UE fully accepts multiple carrier configurations in the N carrier configurations, the second UE may select one carrier configuration from the multiple carrier configurations.
  • the confirmation information may indicate the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE, so that the subsequent communication process between the first UE and the second UE can be Use this carrier configuration.
  • the first UE may use the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE during communication with the second UE. After the second UE sends the confirmation information, it may also use the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE during communication with the first UE. Optionally, if the N types of carrier configurations are determined by the first access network device, the first UE may also send the confirmation information to the first access network device, so that the first access network device knows that the carrier configuration process is over .
  • the confirmation information is, for example, included in an RRC reconfiguration complete sidelink (RRC reconfiguration complete sidelink) message, or may also be included in other messages.
  • RRC reconfiguration complete sidelink RRC reconfiguration complete sidelink
  • the second UE sends rejection information to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives the rejection information from the second UE. If the second UE does not accept the first configuration information, the second UE may send rejection information to the first UE, to instruct the second UE not to accept the first configuration information, or to instruct the second UE not to accept N kinds of carrier configurations.
  • the rejection information may also be called failure information, etc., and the rejection information is used as an example in this document.
  • S205 and S206 are two optional solutions, and the second UE may determine to execute S205 or S206 according to acceptance of the first configuration information (or according to acceptance of N types of carrier configurations).
  • the first configuration information indicates a carrier configuration (for example, the first carrier configuration)
  • the second UE may send rejection information to the first UE.
  • the second UE does not accept the first carrier configuration at all, which means that the second UE does not accept all carriers configured in the first carrier configuration.
  • the first configuration information indicates multiple carrier configurations. Then, if the second UE does not accept the N types of carrier configurations at all, the second UE may send rejection information to the first UE. The second UE completely does not accept the N types of carrier configurations, which means that the second UE does not accept all the carriers configured for each carrier configuration in the N types of carrier configurations.
  • the first UE may no longer configure the second UE, or may reconfigure a corresponding carrier for the second UE, for example, perform S201 again. If the N carrier configurations are determined by the first access network device, the first UE may send the rejection information to the first access network device after receiving the rejection information. After receiving the rejection information, the first access network device may no longer configure the second UE, or may reconfigure a corresponding carrier for the second UE and send it to the first UE, for example, S201 may be performed again.
  • the second UE sends second configuration information to the first UE.
  • the first UE receives second configuration information from the second UE.
  • the second UE may send rejection information to the first UE, or may send second configuration information to the first UE. Or, even if the second UE accepts the first configuration information, the second UE may send the second configuration information to the first UE.
  • the second UE may also send a corresponding indication to the first UE, and the indication may be carried in the second configuration information, or sent together with the second configuration information. According to the indication, the first UE may determine that the second UE accepts the first configuration information or does not accept the first configuration information.
  • S205-S207 are three optional schemes, and the second UE may choose to execute one of these three schemes. Alternatively, S205 and S206 are two optional solutions, and S207 can be used as a further supplementary solution to either of these two solutions.
  • the second configuration information may indicate one or more carrier configurations, each of the one or more carrier configurations includes one or more carriers, and the one or more carriers include information for the second UE to send to the first The carrier on which the UE sends information, and/or the carrier used for the first UE to send information to the second UE.
  • the one or more carrier configurations indicated by the second configuration information are the carrier configurations expected (or wanted; or tended; or expected to be prioritized) by the second UE.
  • the first UE may configure a carrier for the second UE again, for example, re-perform S201.
  • the first UE may use the second configuration information as a reference factor for reconfiguration.
  • the carrier is configured by the first access network device for the second UE
  • the first UE may send the second configuration information to the first access network device, and the first access network device may configure the carrier for the second UE again , and resend the configured carrier to the first UE.
  • S201 may be re-executed.
  • the first access network device may use the second configuration information as a reference factor for reconfiguration.
  • the first UE or the access network device may again provide the second UE with Configure the carrier.
  • the first UE may temporarily not configure a carrier for the second UE.
  • the second configuration information may be used as a reference factor for the subsequent configuration. For example, if the second UE not only sends the second configuration information to the first UE, but also indicates to the first UE that the second UE accepts the first configuration information, the first UE or the access network device may temporarily not provide the configuration information for the second UE.
  • the carrier is configured, but the second configuration information may be stored for subsequent reference.
  • the second UE completely accepts the first configuration information or does not accept the first configuration information at all.
  • a carrier configuration for example, a first carrier configuration
  • the first configuration information indicates multiple carrier configurations. If, for each of the multiple carrier configurations, the second UE accepts some of the carriers configured for each carrier configuration, and for the remaining carriers configured for each carrier configuration, the second UE does not accept, In this case, it is considered that the second UE partially accepts the first configuration information. Or, if for each carrier configuration in at least one of the multiple carrier configurations, the second UE accepts part of the carriers configured for each carrier configuration, and for the rest of the carrier configurations configured for each carrier configuration Carrier, the second UE does not accept it. In addition, the second UE does not accept the rest of the carrier configurations except at least one carrier configuration among the multiple carrier configurations. This situation is also regarded as the second UE partially accepting the first configuration information. .
  • one processing method is that the second UE performs S206, that is, because the second UE cannot fully accept the first configuration information, the second UE may process it in a rejecting manner. Among the carrier configurations indicated by the configuration information, the originally receivable carrier configurations are also rejected.
  • the confirmation information at this time may indicate the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE.
  • the second UE may select one of the carrier configurations as the carrier configuration for acknowledging acceptance.
  • the second UE accepts part of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration, and the confirmation information may indicate this part of carriers; another example, N>1, the second UE accepts each carrier configuration in multiple carrier configurations part of the carriers included, the second UE can select a carrier configuration, and the confirmation information can indicate the carrier configuration and the carriers accepted by the second UE in the carrier configuration; for another example, N>1, the first The second UE accepts the partial carriers included in each carrier configuration in at least one carrier configuration, then, if the number of at least one carrier configuration is 1, the confirmation information may indicate the carrier configuration, and indicate that the second UE is in the carrier configuration.
  • the second UE may select a carrier configuration, the confirmation information may indicate the carrier configuration, and indicate that the second UE is on the carrier Carriers accepted in the configuration.
  • the first UE can determine the carrier accepted by the second UE, so that the first UE and the second UE can use the carrier accepted by the second UE to communicate, and there is no need to configure a carrier for the second UE, and the carrier can be improved. configuration efficiency.
  • the second UE may send desired second configuration information to the first UE, and the first UE or the first access network device may immediately reconfigure the carrier for the second UE, or may not reconfigure the carrier for the second UE temporarily. carrier. Then, if the first UE or the first access network device does not reconfigure the carrier for the second UE, the first UE and the second UE can use the configuration accepted by the second UE to communicate.
  • the first UE may send the first configuration information to the second UE, and the carrier configuration indicated by the first configuration information may indicate the carrier used for the first UE to send information to the second UE, and/or indicate the carrier used for The carrier on which the second UE sends information to the first UE. Then, according to the first configuration information, the second UE can determine on which carrier(s) the second UE should receive information from the first UE, and/or determine which carrier(s) the second UE should send to the first UE. information. Equivalently, through the first configuration information, both the sending and receiving parties can specify the carrier used by the two parties for communication.
  • the sending end can send information on all or part of the carriers accepted by the receiving end, and the receiving end can listen on all accepted carriers. /Receive, so that the information sent by the sending end can be correctly received by the receiving end, which improves the receiving success rate of the receiving end.
  • the second UE may reject the first configuration information, and the first UE may reconfigure the second UE, and if the second UE continues to reject, the first UE may continue to configure; or, If the second UE does not accept the first configuration information, the second UE can indicate to the first UE the carrier configuration expected by the second UE, and the first UE can reconfigure the carrier for the second UE accordingly.
  • the second UE continues to refuse, Then the first UE can continue to configure; or, even if the second UE accepts the first configuration information, the second UE can also indicate to the first UE that the second UE The desired carrier configuration, based on which the first UE may reconfigure the carrier for the second UE, or may be used as a reference for subsequent configuration of the carrier for the second UE.
  • the above is equivalent to the negotiation process between the first UE and the second UE, and is more conducive to determining a carrier acceptable to both the first UE and the second UE.
  • the amount of data transmitted between the first UE and the second UE may not be balanced. For example, a large amount of data may be transmitted in certain time periods, while a small amount of data may be transmitted in certain time periods.
  • the embodiment of the present application considers that if the second UE always monitors/receives on all the carriers configured for the second UE, the power consumption of the second UE is relatively high. In view of this, the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication method, through which the power consumption of the second UE can be reduced. Please refer to FIG. 3 , which is a flowchart of the method.
  • the first UE sends first indication information to the second UE.
  • the second UE receives the first indication information from the first UE.
  • the first indication information may indicate to activate (or use; or apply) the second carrier, or indicate to deactivate (or no longer use) the third carrier.
  • the first UE is a data sending end
  • the second UE is a data receiving end
  • the second UE can receive data from the first UE.
  • the second carrier is a carrier that has not been activated before receiving the first indication information
  • the third carrier is a carrier that has been activated before receiving the first indication information.
  • the first UE and the second UE communicate using the first carrier configuration introduced in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the carrier is, for example, one or more carriers among the M carriers, and the second carrier is different from the third carrier.
  • M carriers refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the first indication information indicates to activate the second carrier, for example, may include frequency information of the second carrier, or include an index of the second carrier.
  • the first indication information indicates to deactivate the third carrier, for example, may include frequency information of the third carrier, or include an index of the third carrier.
  • the first indication information may also carry a corresponding indication, for example, if the first indication information indicates activation of the second carrier, the first indication information may include frequency information or an index of the second carrier, and An activation indication is included; if the first indication information indicates deactivation of the third carrier, the first indication information may include frequency information or an index of the third carrier, and the deactivation indication.
  • the first indication information may not additionally carry the activation indication or the deactivation indication, but indicate the activation or deactivation in an implicit manner.
  • An implicit manner is, for example, indicating activation or deactivation through first indication information in different formats; another implicit manner is, for example, indicating activation or deactivation through different scrambling manners of the first indication information.
  • the embodiment of the present application proposes that the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE may change dynamically.
  • the first UE may send the data to the second UE.
  • the first instruction message For example, if the first UE determines that the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE changes, the first UE may send the first indication information to the second UE. Alternatively, if the first UE configures a carrier for the second UE but has not yet activated the configured carrier, the first UE may also send the first indication information to the second UE, and at this time the first indication information may indicate activation of the second carrier . There may be multiple ways for the first UE to determine the carrier used for sending data from the first UE to the second UE, which are described below with examples.
  • the first way is determined according to an instruction from the first access network device.
  • the first access network device is the first UE Service access network equipment. For example, if the first UE is in the RRC connection state, or when the first UE sends information in a resource scheduling mode of an access network device, the first method may be used.
  • the first access network device may send second indication information to the first UE, and the second indication information may indicate activation of the second carrier or deactivation third carrier.
  • the first access network device may send the second indication information to the first UE; and if the carrier determined this time is the same as the carrier determined last time, the first access network device may not send the second indication to the first UE information.
  • the first UE may send the first indication information to the second UE.
  • the second indication information indicates activation of the second carrier
  • the first indication information indicates activation of the second carrier
  • the second indication information indicates deactivation of the third carrier
  • the first indication information indicates deactivation of the third carrier.
  • the first UE may send the second parameter to the first access network device, and the second parameter may be used to assist the first access network device in determining whether the carrier changes.
  • the second parameter includes, for example, one or more of the following: service quality (quality of service, QoS) information between the first UE and the second UE, CBR of some or all carriers in the carriers accepted by the second UE information, or information about the amount of data buffered by the first UE.
  • the carriers accepted by the second UE include, for example, all or part of the carriers in the first carrier configuration.
  • the QoS information of the service between the first UE and the second UE may include one or more of the following: PC5 interface 5G QoS identifier (PC5 5G QoS identifier, PQI), guaranteed flow bit rate (guaranteed flow bit rate, GFBR), Maximum flow bit rate (maximum flow bit rate, MFBR), PC5 link aggregate maximum bit rate (PC5link aggregate maximum bit rate, PC5Link-AMBR), or distance (range).
  • PC5 interface 5G QoS identifier PC5 5G QoS identifier, PQI
  • guaranteed flow bit rate guaranteed flow bit rate
  • GFBR Guarantee flow bit rate
  • MFBR Maximum flow bit rate
  • PC5 link aggregate maximum bit rate PC5link aggregate maximum bit rate
  • PC5Link-AMBR PC5 Link aggregate maximum bit rate
  • the value of the distance may indicate the applicable distance of the PC5QoS parameter in the PC5 communication between the first UE and the second UE, that is, when the data receiving end (for example, the second UE) and the data sending end (for example, the first UE) ) exceeds the distance (range) indicated by the SL QoS profile, PC5 communication is best-effort, or in other words, PC5 communication quality cannot be guaranteed.
  • the PQI may indicate one or more of the following PC5QoS parameters: resource type (resource type), priority level (priority level), packet delay budget (packet delay budget, PDB), packet error rate (packet error rate , PER), sliding window (averaging window), or maximum data burst volume (MDBV).
  • the resource type can be guaranteed bit rate (guaranteed bit rate, GBR), delay critical GBR (delay critical GBR) or non-GBR (non-GBR)).
  • the data volume information cached by the first UE may be information on the data volume stored in the buffer zone of the first UE, such as a sidelink buffer status report (buffer status report, BSR) of the first UE, and the sidelink BSR may include the first UE buffer size information.
  • the data buffered by the first UE includes, for example, data to be sent to the second UE.
  • the data volume information cached by the first UE indicates that the first UE caches a large amount of data and may require more carrier transmission, then the first access network device may instruct to activate the second carrier to meet the data transmission requirements and reduce Small data transmission delay.
  • the first access network device may determine to deactivate the third carrier, so that the third carrier The second UE does not need to continue to monitor/receive on the third carrier, so as to reduce the power consumption of the second UE.
  • the first access network device may determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier between the first UE and the second UE according to the second parameter, or the first access network device may refer to other factors in addition to the second parameter , for the first access
  • the specific implementation manner of the network device is not limited.
  • the first UE determines by itself. For example, if the first UE is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, or the first UE sends information in a mode in which the UE independently selects resources, the second method may be used.
  • the first UE may determine according to the first parameter whether to activate or deactivate the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE.
  • the first parameter includes, for example, one or more of the following: QoS information of the service between the first UE and the second UE, CBR information of some or all of the carriers accepted by the second UE, or the cached information of the first UE data volume information.
  • QoS information of the service between the first UE and the second UE CBR information of some or all of the carriers accepted by the second UE, or the cached information of the first UE data volume information.
  • the first parameter and the second parameter may be the same parameter, or may be completely or partially different.
  • the first UE determines by itself. Different from the second manner, in the third manner, the first UE may be determined according to the first condition. Regardless of whether the first UE is in the RRC connected state, the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, and whether the first UE sends information in the mode of UE autonomously selecting resources or in the mode of resource scheduling by access network equipment, the first UE will A third manner may be used to determine whether to activate or deactivate the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE.
  • the first condition may come from the first access network device.
  • the first access network device configures the first condition to the first UE through a unicast message, or the first condition may be included in a system message, and the first UE may obtain the first condition by receiving the system message from the first access network device. information.
  • the first condition may be configured by the first access network device.
  • the first condition may be preconfigured in the first UE.
  • the first condition may also come from the second UE, and the second UE may configure the first condition to the first UE.
  • the first condition may also be determined by the first UE itself.
  • the first condition is a data volume condition.
  • the first UE may determine whether to activate or deactivate a carrier for the first UE to send data to the second UE according to the amount of data to be transmitted by the first UE.
  • a data volume condition includes a correspondence between a first threshold and the number of carriers, and the first threshold may also be referred to as a data volume threshold. If the amount of data to be transmitted by the first UE is less than a certain first threshold, the number of carriers that the first UE can use (or activate) should be less than or equal to the number of carriers corresponding to the first threshold.
  • the corresponding relationship may include at least one first threshold and at least one number of carriers, and the first threshold and the number of carriers may be in one-to-one correspondence. It can be understood that the corresponding relationship includes at least one sub-relationship, and one of the sub-relationships is a corresponding relationship between a first threshold and a number of carriers.
  • One of the sub-relationships is, for example, that the number of carriers corresponding to the first threshold 1 is 3. Then, if the amount of data to be transmitted by the first UE is less than the first threshold 1, the number of carriers that the first UE can use should be less than or equal to 3.
  • the first UE does not need to perform an activation or deactivation operation, that is, there is no need to perform S301; or, if the number of carriers currently activated by the first UE is less than 3, the first UE S301 may not be performed, that is, the activation or deactivation operation is not performed, or the first UE may also perform S301, for example, the first indication information indicates activation of the second carrier; or, if the number of carriers currently activated by the first UE is greater than 3 , the first UE may perform S301, for example, the first indication information indicates to deactivate the third carrier.
  • This correspondence can be applied to all CBRs, or different CBRs can have different correspondences.
  • the CBR range can be divided, and different corresponding relationships can be configured for different CBR ranges, so that the determined number of carriers is more in line with the current carrier usage.
  • another data volume condition includes, if the data volume to be transmitted by the first UE is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE activates the second carrier; or, if the data volume to be transmitted by the first UE is less than the second threshold threshold, the first UE deactivates the third carrier.
  • the second carrier may be a predetermined carrier, or a carrier associated with the first threshold, Or it is a carrier selected by the first UE itself.
  • the third carrier may be a predetermined carrier, or a carrier associated with the second threshold, or a carrier selected by the first UE.
  • the second threshold may be less than or equal to the first threshold. This condition is relatively simple and easy to implement.
  • the first UE may also send information to the first access network device, where the information may indicate that the corresponding carrier has been activated or deactivated.
  • the second UE starts or restarts a timer.
  • the first indication information indicates to deactivate the third carrier, but the second UE does not receive the first indication information, then the second UE will continue to monitor/receive on the third carrier, resulting in waste of power of the second UE.
  • the second UE will always be on Monitoring/receiving on the carrier also causes waste of power of the second UE.
  • the embodiment of the present application proposes that the second UE may maintain a timer for the carrier, so as to control the activation or deactivation of the carrier (or transmission function) through the timer.
  • the second UE maintains the timer in different manners, and an example is introduced below.
  • the second UE can maintain a timer for different carriers, for example called the first timer, the number of the first timer is the same as the carrier configured (or accepted by the second UE) the same amount.
  • the timing duration of the first timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the second UE.
  • the second UE may start or restart a first timer corresponding to a carrier under one or more of the following conditions: when the carrier is activated, when receiving information from the first UE on the carrier, Or, when sending information to the first UE on the carrier.
  • the first indication information indicates activation of the second carrier, and the second UE may start or restart the first timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information.
  • the first indication information is carried in a physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink share channel, PSSCH), then the second UE may start or restart the first timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH.
  • the time unit is, for example, a subframe (subframe), a time slot (slot), an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbol (symbol), or a millisecond.
  • the second UE can start or restart the first timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the second UE may start at the first time unit after receiving information from the first UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU) Or restart the corresponding first timer.
  • the SCI used to trigger the second UE to start or restart the first timer corresponding to the carrier may satisfy: the source layer-1ID contained in the SCI is the lower 8 bits of the layer-2ID of the first UE (8 is the least effective bit (least significant bit, LSB)), and the destination layer-1ID contained in the SCI is the lower 8 bits (8LSB) of the layer-2ID of the second UE.
  • the source layer-1ID contained in the SCI is the lower 8 bits of the layer-2ID of the first UE (8 is the least effective bit (least significant bit, LSB)
  • LSB least effective bit
  • the second UE may start or restart the first timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, at the first time unit after the second UE sends information to the first UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU), start or The corresponding first timer is restarted.
  • the second UE starts the first timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information for indicating activation of the second carrier.
  • the second UE receives the PSSCH from the first UE on the second carrier or sends a MAC PDU to the first UE on the second carrier, then the second UE can restart the first UE. timer.
  • the second UE may deactivate the carrier corresponding to the first timer. If the second UE deactivates a certain carrier, the second UE no longer monitors/receives the carrier, or in other words, no longer monitors or receives information on the carrier. In this way, even if the second UE does not receive an instruction to deactivate the carrier from the first UE, or the first UE does not instruct the second UE to deactivate the carrier, the second UE can also deactivate the carrier by itself through the first timer.
  • the corresponding carrier is activated to reduce the power consumption of the second UE due to monitoring/receiving.
  • the second UE may no longer monitor/receive information from the first UE on the carrier, and no longer send information to the first UE on the carrier, that is , the second UE no longer communicates with the first UE on the carrier.
  • the second UE can continue to use the carrier to communicate with other UEs, for example, the second UE can continue to send information to other UEs on the carrier, and/or monitor/receive information from other UEs on the carrier, which can improve carrier utilization.
  • the "deactivation" of a certain carrier by a certain UE mentioned in the first method may mean that the UE does not communicate with any UE on the carrier, that is, the UE no longer uses the carrier; correspondingly, the UE "Activating" a certain carrier may mean that the UE starts to communicate with any UE on the carrier, that is, the UE starts to use the carrier. Then the first indication information in S301 may instruct the UE to "deactivate” the third carrier or instruct the UE to "activate” the second carrier.
  • deactivating" a certain carrier by the UE may also mean that the UE no longer communicates with a certain UE on the carrier, but it does not limit whether the UE communicates with other UEs on the carrier; correspondingly, the UE "activates" a certain carrier.
  • a carrier may mean that the UE starts to communicate with a certain UE on the carrier, and there is no restriction on the communication between the UE and other UEs on the carrier.
  • the first indication information instructs the UE to "deactivate” the third carrier, it may specifically instruct the UE to deactivate a certain transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, and if the first indication information indicates the UE to "activate”
  • the second carrier may specifically instruct the UE to activate the transmission function of the second UE on the carrier.
  • the transmission function includes, for example, a function of the second UE sending information to the first UE, and a function of the second UE receiving information from the first UE.
  • the UE may disable the first timer corresponding to the third carrier in addition to deactivating the transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier.
  • the second UE can maintain two timers for different carriers, for example, the third timer and the fourth timer, and the number of the third timer is the same as that configured by the second UE (or, the first The number of carriers accepted by the second UE is the same, and the number of the fourth timer is also the same as the number of carriers configured (or accepted by the second UE).
  • the timing duration of the third timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the second UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the second UE.
  • the timing duration of the fourth timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the second UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the second UE.
  • the timing duration of the third timer and the timing duration of the fourth timer may or may not be equal.
  • the second UE may maintain the third timer and the fourth timer at the same time, or may only maintain any one of the two timers. In this embodiment of the present application, the second UE maintains the third timer and the fourth timer at the same time as an example.
  • the third timer corresponding to a carrier is used to monitor the first transmission function of the second UE on the carrier, and the first transmission function includes, for example, sending information from the second UE to the first UE.
  • the first transmission function may include a function of the second UE sending information to the first UE.
  • the second UE when the first transmission function of the second UE on a carrier is activated, and/or when the second UE performs the first transmission function with the first UE on the carrier, the second UE may start or Restart the third timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the first instruction information in S301 indicates to activate the second carrier, it may specifically indicate to activate the first transmission function and/or the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier; or, in S301 If the first instruction information indicates to deactivate the third carrier, it may specifically indicate to deactivate the first transmission function and/or the second transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier.
  • the first indication information indicates to activate the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, and the second UE may start or restart the third timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information. For example, if the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, then the second UE may start or restart the third timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH. And if the first indication information indicates to activate the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, and does not indicate to activate the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, the third timer corresponding to the second carrier stay the same.
  • the second UE may start or restart a third timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the first transmission function is for the second UE to send information to the first UE, so if the second UE sends one of the information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU to the first UE on a certain carrier item or items, the second UE may start or restart the third timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the second UE may start or end the first time unit after sending information to the first UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU) to the first UE.
  • the corresponding third timer is restarted.
  • the second UE starts a third timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information for indicating activation of the second carrier.
  • the second UE performs the first transmission function with the first UE on the second carrier, then the second UE may restart the third timer.
  • the second UE may deactivate the second UE's first timer on the carrier corresponding to the third timer. transfer function. Or, if the first indication information in S301 indicates to deactivate the first transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, the second UE may also deactivate the first transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, and , the second UE may also disable the third timer corresponding to the third carrier.
  • the deactivation of the first transmission function of the second UE on a certain carrier by the second UE may be implemented in that the second UE no longer performs the first transmission function on the carrier, but for other transmissions of the second UE on the carrier
  • the function is not limited, for example, the second UE may also perform a second transmission function on the carrier (if the fourth timer does not expire), and/or perform a transmission function with other UEs on the carrier, etc.
  • the second UE can also deactivate the carrier by itself through the third timer.
  • the transmission function on the corresponding carrier is activated to reduce the power consumption of the second UE.
  • the utilization rate of the carrier can be improved.
  • a fourth timer corresponding to a carrier is used to monitor a second transmission function of the second UE on the carrier, where the second transmission function includes, for example, that the second UE receives information from the first UE.
  • the second transmission function may include a function for the second UE to receive information from the first UE.
  • the second UE when the second transmission function of the second UE on a carrier is activated, and/or when the second UE performs the second transmission function with the first UE on the carrier, the second UE may start or Restart the fourth timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the first indication information indicates to activate the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, and the second UE may start or restart a fourth timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information. For example, if the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, then the second UE may start or restart the fourth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH. And if the first indication information indicates to activate the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, and does not indicate to activate the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, then the fourth timer corresponding to the second carrier stay the same.
  • the second UE may start or restart a fourth timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the first transmission function is that the second UE receives information from the first UE, then if the second UE receives one of the information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU from the first UE on a certain carrier item or items, the second UE may start or restart the fourth timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the second UE may start or end the first time unit after receiving information from the first UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU). The corresponding fourth timer is restarted.
  • the second UE may deactivate the second UE on the carrier corresponding to the third timer. transfer function. Or, if the first indication information in S301 indicates to deactivate the second transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, the second UE may also deactivate the second transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, and , the second UE may also disable the fourth timer corresponding to the third carrier.
  • the deactivation of the second transmission function of the second UE on a certain carrier by the second UE may be realized in that the second UE no longer performs the second transmission function on the carrier, but for other transmissions of the second UE on the carrier
  • the function is not limited, for example, the second UE may also perform the first transmission function on the carrier (if the third timer has not expired), and/or perform the transmission function with other UEs on the carrier, etc.
  • the second UE can also deactivate the carrier by itself through the fourth timer.
  • the transmission function on the corresponding carrier is activated to reduce the power consumption of the second UE.
  • the utilization rate of the carrier can be improved.
  • the third timer and the fourth timer corresponding to a carrier can monitor different transmission functions respectively, and can realize finer-grained control over the transmission function of the second UE, for example, a kind of transmission function of the second UE When the transmission function is deactivated, another transmission function and other transmission functions may still be available, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the second UE.
  • the first UE starts or restarts a timer.
  • the carrier between the first UE and the second UE is used by both the first UE and the second UE, if only the second UE unilaterally deactivates a certain carrier according to the timer, or deactivates a certain carrier on a certain carrier Part of the transmission function of the carrier, but the first UE does not know about it, the first UE may also communicate with the second UE through the carrier, which may lead to information loss. Therefore, in order to make the information at both ends equal, the first UE may also maintain a corresponding timer for the carrier, so as to control the activation or deactivation of the carrier (or transmission function) through the timer.
  • the manner in which the first UE maintains the timer corresponds to the manner in which the second UE maintains the timer, and an example is introduced below.
  • the third way This is actually the first way for the first UE to maintain the timer, but to avoid confusion with the first way in S302, the way for the first UE is called the third way.
  • the first UE can maintain a timer for different carriers, and the number of timers maintained by the first UE for the carrier is the same as the carrier configured by the first UE for the second UE (or, The number of accepted carriers) is the same.
  • the timing duration of the timer maintained by the first UE may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the first UE.
  • the timer maintained by the first UE may also be called a first timer, or to distinguish it from the timer maintained by the second UE, the timer maintained by the first UE may be called a second timer.
  • the first UE may start or restart a second timer corresponding to a carrier under one or more of the following conditions: when the carrier is activated, when receiving information from the second UE on the carrier, Or, when sending information to the second UE on the carrier.
  • the first indication information indicates to activate the second carrier, and the first UE may start or restart the second timer corresponding to the second carrier after sending the first indication information.
  • the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, then the first UE may start or restart the second timer corresponding to the second carrier within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH.
  • the first UE receives the second indication information from the first access network device, and the second indication information indicates activation of the second carrier, then the first UE may also start or restart the second carrier after receiving the second indication information.
  • the second timer corresponding to the two carriers For example, the second indication information is carried in the physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDCCH), then the first UE can start or restart the second timing corresponding to the second carrier in the first time unit after the end of the PDSCH device.
  • PDCCH physical downlink shared channel
  • the first UE may start or restart the second timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, if the first UE sends one or more items of SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU to the second UE on a certain carrier, the first UE can start or restart the second UE corresponding to the carrier. timer. For example, in the first time unit after sending information to the first UE (the information is, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU), start or The corresponding second timer is restarted.
  • the first UE can start or restart the first UE corresponding to the carrier.
  • Two timers For example, the first UE may start or end the first time unit after receiving information from the second UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU). The corresponding second timer is restarted.
  • the first UE starts the second timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the second indication information for indicating activation of the second carrier, or after sending the first indication information for indicating activation of the second carrier.
  • the first UE sends SCI to the second UE on the second carrier or receives PSSCH from the second UE on the second carrier, then the first UE can restart the second timer .
  • the first UE may deactivate the carrier corresponding to the second timer. If the first UE deactivates a certain carrier, the first UE will no longer send information on the carrier to the second UE, for example, no longer send SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC to the second UE on the carrier PDUs, etc. In this way, the second UE and the first UE can maintain carrier activation and deactivation information synchronously, so that the first UE and the second UE use the same carrier, reduce information loss, and save power consumption of the second UE.
  • the first UE may no longer monitor/receive information from the second UE on the carrier, and no longer send information to the second UE on the carrier, that is , the first UE no longer communicates with the second UE on the carrier. But the first UE can still continue Using the carrier to communicate with other UEs, for example, the first UE can continue to send information to other UEs on the carrier, and/or monitor/receive information from other UEs on the carrier, which can improve the utilization of the carrier. No matter which of the above methods is adopted, since both the first UE and the second UE maintain the timer, the amount of indication information for deactivating the carrier sent by the first UE to the second UE can be reduced, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the fourth way This is actually the first way for the first UE to maintain the timer. In order to avoid confusion with the second way in S302, the way for the first UE is called the fourth way.
  • the first UE can maintain two timers for different carriers, for example, the fifth timer and the sixth timer, and the number of the fifth timer is the same as that configured by the second UE (or, the second timer).
  • the number of carriers accepted by the second UE is the same, and the number of the sixth timer is also the same as the number of carriers configured (or accepted by the second UE).
  • the timing duration of the fifth timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the second UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the first UE.
  • the timing duration of the sixth timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the second UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the second UE.
  • the timing duration of the fifth timer and the timing duration of the sixth timer may or may not be equal.
  • the first UE may maintain the fifth timer and the sixth timer at the same time, or may only maintain any one of the two timers. In this embodiment of the present application, the first UE maintains the fifth timer and the sixth timer at the same time as an example.
  • a fifth timer corresponding to a carrier is used for monitoring a third transmission function of the first UE on the carrier, where the third transmission function includes, for example, that the first UE receives information from the second UE.
  • the third transmission function may include a function for the first UE to receive information from the second UE.
  • the third transmission function of the first UE corresponds to the first transmission function of the second UE.
  • the first transmission function of the second UE includes the second UE sending information to the first UE
  • the third transmission function of the first UE includes the first UE receiving information from the second UE.
  • the first UE when the third transmission function of the first UE on a carrier is activated, and/or when the first UE performs the third transmission function with the second UE on the carrier, the first UE may start or Restart the fifth timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the first UE determines to activate or deactivate the carrier according to the instruction of the access network device, then if the second instruction information indicates that the second carrier is activated, it may specifically indicate that the first UE is activated on the second carrier. or, if the second indication information indicates deactivation of the third carrier, it may specifically indicate deactivation of the third transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier and/or Fourth transfer function.
  • the second indication information indicates to activate the third transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier, or the first UE determines to activate the third transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier according to any of the methods introduced in S301, Then, when the first UE finishes receiving the second indication information, or finishes sending the first indication information (the first indication information indicates activation of the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier), the second UE may start or restart the second transmission function.
  • the fifth timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, if the second indication information is carried in the PDCCH, then the first UE may start or restart the fifth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PDCCH.
  • the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, and the first UE may start or restart the fifth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH.
  • the second indication information indicates to activate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier, and does not indicate to activate the third transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, or the first UE determines not to activate the first UE
  • the third transmission function on the second carrier, or the first indication information indicates activation of the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier and does not indicate activation of the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, then The fifth timer corresponding to the second carrier remains unchanged.
  • the first UE may start or Restart the fifth timer corresponding to the carrier. For this, refer to the related introduction of S302.
  • the first UE may deactivate the first UE's third timer on the carrier corresponding to the fifth timer. transfer function. Or, if the first indication information in S301 indicates to deactivate the first transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, or the second indication information indicates to deactivate the third transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier, then The first UE may also deactivate the third transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier, and in addition, the first UE may also disable the fifth timer corresponding to the third carrier.
  • the deactivation of the third transmission function of the first UE on a certain carrier by the first UE may be realized in that the first UE no longer performs the third transmission function on the carrier, but for other transmissions of the first UE on the carrier
  • the function is not limited, for example, the first UE may also perform the fourth transmission function on the carrier (if the sixth timer has not expired), and/or perform the transmission function with other UEs on the carrier, etc.
  • the first UE can pass the fifth timing
  • the device automatically deactivates the transmission function on the corresponding carrier, so as to reduce the power consumption of the first UE.
  • the utilization rate of the carrier can be improved.
  • a sixth timer corresponding to a carrier is used to monitor a fourth transmission function of the first UE on the carrier, where the fourth transmission function includes, for example, sending information from the first UE to the second UE.
  • the fourth transmission function may include a function of the first UE sending information to the second UE.
  • the fourth transmission function of the first UE corresponds to the second transmission function of the second UE.
  • the fourth transmission function of the first UE includes the first UE sending information to the second UE
  • the second transmission function of the second UE includes the second UE receiving information from the first UE.
  • the first UE when the fourth transmission function of the first UE on a carrier is activated, and/or when the first UE performs the fourth transmission function with the second UE on the carrier, the first UE may start or Restart the sixth timer corresponding to the carrier.
  • the second indication information indicates to activate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier, or the first UE determines to activate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier according to any method described in S301, Then, when the first UE finishes receiving the second indication information, or finishes sending the first indication information (the first indication information indicates activation of the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier), the second UE may start or restart the second transmission function.
  • the sixth timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, if the second indication information is carried in the PDCCH, then the first UE may start or restart the sixth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PDCCH.
  • the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, and the first UE may start or restart the sixth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH.
  • the second indication information indicates to activate the third transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier, and does not indicate to activate the fourth transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, or the first UE determines not to activate the first UE
  • the fourth transmission function on the second carrier, or the first indication information indicates activation of the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier and does not indicate activation of the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, then The sixth timer corresponding to the second carrier remains unchanged.
  • the first UE may start or restart a sixth timer corresponding to the carrier. For this, refer to the related introduction of S302.
  • the first UE may deactivate the fourth timer of the first UE on the carrier corresponding to the sixth timer. transfer function. Or, if the first indication information in S301 indicates to deactivate the second transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, or the second indication information indicates to deactivate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier, then The first UE may also deactivate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier, and in addition, the first UE may also disable the sixth timer corresponding to the third carrier.
  • the deactivation of the fourth transmission function of the first UE on a certain carrier by the first UE may be realized as that the first UE is no longer on the The fourth transmission function is performed on the carrier, but there is no restriction on other transmission functions of the first UE on the carrier, for example, the first UE may also perform the third transmission function on the carrier (if the fifth timer has not expired), and /or perform a transmission function with other UEs on the carrier, etc.
  • the first UE can pass the sixth timing
  • the device automatically deactivates the transmission function on the corresponding carrier, so as to reduce the power consumption of the first UE.
  • the utilization rate of the carrier can be improved.
  • the fifth timer and the sixth timer corresponding to a carrier can monitor different transmission functions respectively, and can realize finer-grained control over the transmission function of the first UE, for example, a kind of transmission function of the first UE When the transmission function is deactivated, another transmission function and other transmission functions may still be available, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the first UE.
  • the "activation" of a certain carrier by a certain UE in the embodiment of the present application may mean that the UE does not communicate with any UE on the carrier, that is, the UE no longer uses the carrier; or it may mean that the UE does not communicate with any UE on the carrier; The UE no longer performs some transmission functions on the carrier, but there is no restriction on whether the UE performs other transmission functions on the carrier.
  • S302 and S303 can be executed simultaneously, or S302 is executed before S303, or S302 is executed after S303.
  • the first UE or the first access network device may determine to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier according to the current communication situation between the first UE and the second UE, or activate or deactivate the transmission of the UE on the corresponding carrier
  • the function can not only meet the data transmission requirements, reduce the data transmission delay, but also reduce the power consumption of the UE.
  • a carrier can be configured for the second UE through the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the corresponding carrier can be activated or deactivated through the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , or activated or deactivated. Activate the transmission function of the UE on the corresponding carrier.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 may not be combined, but applied separately.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 400 may be the first UE described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or the circuit system of the first UE, and is used to implement the method corresponding to the first UE in the above method embodiment. Methods.
  • the communication device 400 may be the second UE or the circuit system of the second UE described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. Two UE methods.
  • the communication device 400 may be the access network device or the circuit system of the access network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , and is used to implement the corresponding A method for access network equipment.
  • a circuit system is a chip system.
  • the communication device 400 includes at least one processor 401 .
  • the processor 401 can be used for internal processing of the device to realize certain control processing functions.
  • processor 401 includes instructions.
  • processor 401 may store data.
  • different processors may be separate devices, may be located in different physical locations, and may be located on different integrated circuits.
  • different processors may be integrated within one or more processors, eg, on one or more integrated circuits.
  • the communication device 400 includes one or more memories 403 for storing instructions.
  • data may also be stored in the memory 403 .
  • the processor and memory can be set separately or integrated together.
  • the communication device 400 includes a communication line 402 and at least one communication interface 404 .
  • the memory 403 , the communication line 402 and the communication interface 404 are all options, they are all indicated by dotted lines in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication device 400 may further include a transceiver and/or an antenna.
  • the transceiver can be used to communicate to other mounted device to send messages or receive messages from other devices.
  • the transceiver may be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, an input-output interface, etc., and is used to realize the transceiver function of the communication device 400 through an antenna.
  • the transceiver includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver).
  • the transmitter can be used to generate a radio frequency (radio frequency) signal from a baseband signal
  • the receiver can be used to convert the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal.
  • the processor 401 may include a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, a specific application integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), or one or more programs for controlling the implementation of the embodiment of the present application. integrated circuits.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • Communication line 402 may include a pathway for communicating information between the above-described components.
  • Communication interface 404 using any device such as a transceiver, for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (radio access network, RAN), wireless local area network (wireless local area networks, WLAN), Wired access network, etc.
  • radio access network radio access network
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • Wired access network etc.
  • Memory 403 may be read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or other types that can store information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be programmed by a computer Any other medium accessed, but not limited to.
  • the memory 403 may exist independently, and is connected to the processor 401 through the communication line 402 . Alternatively, the memory 403 can also be integrated with the processor 401 .
  • the memory 403 is used to store computer-executed instructions for executing the solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 401 .
  • the processor 401 is configured to execute computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 403, so as to implement the communication method provided by the above-mentioned embodiments in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer-executed instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as application program codes, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 401 may include one or more CPUs, for example, CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 4 .
  • the communication device 400 may include multiple processors, for example, the processor 401 and the processor 408 in FIG. 4 .
  • Each of these processors may be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor.
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
  • the chip When the apparatus shown in FIG. 4 is a chip, such as a chip of the first UE, or a chip of the second UE, or a chip of an access network device, the chip includes a processor 401 (may also include a processor 408), Communication line 402 , memory 403 and communication interface 404 .
  • the communication interface 404 may be an input interface, a pin, or a circuit.
  • the memory 403 may be a register, a cache, and the like.
  • the processor 401 and the processor 408 may be a general-purpose CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits for controlling program execution of the communication method in any of the above-mentioned embodiments.
  • the embodiment of the present application may divide the device into functional modules according to the above method example, for example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules.
  • the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, There may be another division method.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a device, and the device 500 may be the first UE, the second UE or the access network involved in the above method embodiments.
  • the device is either a chip in the first UE, a chip in the second UE, or a chip in the access network device.
  • the apparatus 500 includes a sending unit 501 , a processing unit 502 and a receiving unit 503 .
  • the apparatus 500 can be used to implement the steps performed by the first UE, the second UE, or the access network device in the method of the embodiment of the present application, and related features can refer to the above embodiments, and will not be repeated here. .
  • the functions/implementation process of the sending unit 501, the receiving unit 503, and the processing unit 502 in FIG. 5 may be implemented by the processor 401 in FIG. 4 invoking computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 403.
  • the function/implementation process of the processing unit 502 in FIG. 5 can be realized by calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 403 by the processor 401 in FIG. The process may be implemented through communication interface 404 in FIG. 4 .
  • the functions/implementation process of the sending unit 501 and the receiving unit 503 may also be implemented through pins or circuits.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores computer programs or instructions, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the first UE, the second A method performed by a UE or an access network device.
  • the functions described in the above embodiments can be realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products.
  • the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several
  • the instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, ROM, RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk and other various media that can store program codes.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on the computer, the computer is made to execute any one of the foregoing method embodiments by the first UE, the second 2. The method performed by the UE or the access network equipment.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a processing apparatus, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method performed by the first UE, the second UE, or the access network device involved in any one of the above method embodiments.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, or a magnetic tape), an optical medium (such as a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (solid state disk, SSD)), etc.
  • the various illustrative logic units and circuits described in the embodiments of this application can be processed by a general-purpose processor, digital signal Digital signal processor (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic , discrete hardware components, or any combination of the above designed to implement or operate the described functions.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, and optionally, the general-purpose processor may also be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller or state machine.
  • a processor may also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration to accomplish.
  • the steps of the method or algorithm described in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embedded in hardware, a software unit executed by a processor, or a combination of both.
  • the software unit may be stored in RAM, flash memory, ROM, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), EEPROM, registers, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or any other form in the art in the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can be connected to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium, and can write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be integrated into the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium can be set in the ASIC, and the ASIC can be set in the terminal device.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also be disposed in different components in the terminal device.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to a communication method and device. A first terminal device determines N types of carrier configurations, each of the N types of carrier configurations comprising a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to a second terminal device, and/or comprising a carrier for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device. The first terminal device sends first configuration information to the second terminal device, so as to indicate the N types of carrier configurations. By means of the first configuration information, both a sender and a receiver can clearly know the carriers used for communication between the two parties, so that the information sent by the sender can be correctly received by the receiver, and the reception success rate of the receiver is improved.

Description

一种通信方法及设备A communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross References to Related Applications
本申请要求在2022年03月01日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202210194310.6、申请名称为“一种侧链载波配置方法”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中；本申请要求在2022年04月20日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202210420954.2、申请名称为“一种通信方法及设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202210194310.6 and the application name "A Side Chain Carrier Configuration Method" submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office of China on March 1, 2022, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. In application; this application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on April 20, 2022, with the application number 202210420954.2 and the application title "A communication method and device", the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法及设备。The present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
侧行链路(sidelink，SL)最初是为车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)应用开发的。在SL通信场景下，一般会为终端设备配置一个载波，该终端设备可通过该载波发送侧行数据，也可以在该载波上监听侧行数据。Sidelink (SL) was originally developed for vehicle to everything (V2X) applications. In the SL communication scenario, a carrier is generally configured for the terminal device, and the terminal device can send sidelink data through the carrier, and can also monitor sidelink data on the carrier.
不同的终端设备被配置的载波可能相同也可能不同。如果为不同的终端设备配置了不同的载波，则作为发送端的终端设备在该终端设备的载波上向作为接收端的终端设备发送侧行数据，而接收端被配置的是另一个载波，则接收端只会在该另一个载波上监听，因此接收端无法接收该侧行数据。该问题亟待解决。Different terminal devices may be configured with the same or different carriers. If different carriers are configured for different terminal devices, the terminal device as the sending end sends sidelink data to the terminal device as the receiving end on the carrier of the terminal device, and the receiving end is configured with another carrier, then the receiving end It will only listen on this other carrier, so the receiving end cannot receive the sidelink data. This problem needs to be solved urgently.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及设备，用于提高接收端的接收成功率。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to improve the receiving success rate of a receiving end.
第一方面，提供第一种通信方法，该方法可由终端设备执行，或由包括终端设备功能的其他设备执行，或由芯片***(或，芯片)或其他功能模块执行，该芯片***或功能模块能够实现终端设备的功能，该芯片***或功能模块例如设置在终端设备中。该终端设备例如为第一终端设备。该方法包括：确定N种载波配置，所述N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，N为正整数；向所述第二终端设备发送第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于指示所述N种载波配置。In the first aspect, a first communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including terminal device functions, or by a chip system (or chip) or other functional modules, the chip system or functional modules The function of the terminal device can be realized, and the chip system or the functional module is set in the terminal device, for example. The terminal device is, for example, the first terminal device. The method includes: determining N types of carrier configurations, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier for the second terminal device The terminal device sends information carriers to the first terminal device, where N is a positive integer; and sends first configuration information to the second terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
本申请实施例中，第一终端设备可以向第二终端设备发送第一配置信息，第一配置信息指示的每种载波配置可指示用于第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或指示用于第二终端设备向第一终端设备发送信息的载波。那么第二终端设备根据第一配置信息，就能确定第二终端设备应该在哪个或哪些载波上接收来自第一终端设备的信息，和/或确定第二终端设备应该在哪个或哪些载波上向第一终端设备发送信息。相当于，通过第一配置信息能够使得收发双方都明确双方通信所使用的载波，从而发送端所发送的信息能够被接收端正确接收，提高了接收端的接收成功率。In this embodiment of the present application, the first terminal device may send first configuration information to the second terminal device, and each carrier configuration indicated by the first configuration information may indicate a carrier used for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, And/or indicate the carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device. Then, according to the first configuration information, the second terminal device can determine on which carrier(s) the second terminal device should receive information from the first terminal device, and/or determine which carrier(s) the second terminal device should receive information from the first terminal device on The first terminal device sends information. That is to say, through the first configuration information, both the transmitting and receiving parties can specify the carrier used by the two parties for communication, so that the information sent by the transmitting end can be correctly received by the receiving end, and the receiving success rate of the receiving end is improved.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述第一配置信息包括所述载波的频率信息，或包括所述 载波的索引。要指示一个载波，可以通过该载波的频率信息指示，这种指示方式较为明确。或者也可以通过该载波的索引指示，载波的索引一般来说信息量较小，有利于节省信令开销。In an optional implementation manner, the first configuration information includes frequency information of the carrier, or includes the The index of the carrier. To indicate a carrier, it can be indicated through the frequency information of the carrier, which is relatively clear. Alternatively, it may be indicated by the index of the carrier. Generally speaking, the index of the carrier has a small amount of information, which is beneficial to save signaling overhead.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第二终端设备接收确认信息，所述确认信息用于指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置，或指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置包括的部分载波；或，从所述第二终端设备接收拒绝信息，所述拒绝信息用于指示所述第二终端设备拒绝所述N种载波配置；或，从所述第二终端设备接收第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于指示所述第二终端设备期望的载波配置。第二终端设备可能接受N种载波配置中的一种载波配置，或者接受N种载波配置中的一种载波配置所包括的部分配置，这两种情况都可认为第二终端设备接受了N种载波配置。那么第二终端设备可以向第一终端设备发送确认信息，从而配置过程结束，第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以利用第二终端设备接受的配置进行通信。或者，第二终端设备也可能不接受N种载波配置，则第二终端设备可以向第一终端设备发送拒绝信息和/或第二配置信息。如果第一终端设备接收了拒绝信息，则第一终端设备可以重新为第二终端设备配置载波，或者也可以停止配置过程。或者，如果第一终端设备接收了第二配置信息，则第一终端设备可以以第二配置信息为参考，重新为第二终端设备配置载波，既能够提高配置成功率，也能使得所配置的载波满足第二终端设备的需求。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving confirmation information from the second terminal device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the second terminal device to accept the first of the N types of carrier configurations. Carrier configuration, or instructing the second terminal device to accept part of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration of the N types of carrier configurations; or, receiving rejection information from the second terminal device, where the rejection information is used to indicate the The second terminal device rejects the N types of carrier configurations; or, receiving second configuration information from the second terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the carrier configuration expected by the second terminal device. The second terminal device may accept one of the N carrier configurations, or accept a part of the configuration included in one of the N carrier configurations. In both cases, the second terminal device can be considered to have accepted the N carrier configurations. carrier configuration. Then the second terminal device can send confirmation information to the first terminal device, so that the configuration process ends, and the first terminal device and the second terminal device can use the configuration accepted by the second terminal device to communicate. Alternatively, the second terminal device may not accept the N types of carrier configurations, and the second terminal device may send rejection information and/or second configuration information to the first terminal device. If the first terminal device receives the rejection information, the first terminal device may reconfigure the carrier for the second terminal device, or may also stop the configuration process. Or, if the first terminal device receives the second configuration information, the first terminal device can use the second configuration information as a reference to reconfigure the carrier for the second terminal device, which can not only improve the configuration success rate, but also make the configured The carrier meets the requirements of the second terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，在确定N种载波配置之前，所述方法还包括：从所述第二终端设备接收能力信息，所述能力信息包括如下一项或多项：所述第二终端设备支持的频带信息，所述第二终端设备支持的频带组合信息，或，所述第二终端设备对于多载波的支持能力信息。为了使得为第二终端设备配置的载波尽量在第二终端设备的能力范围内，减少因第二终端设备的能力无法支持而导致配置失败的情况，第一终端设备可以先从第二终端设备获得能力信息。In an optional implementation manner, before determining the N types of carrier configurations, the method further includes: receiving capability information from the second terminal device, where the capability information includes one or more of the following: the first The frequency band information supported by the second terminal device, the frequency band combination information supported by the second terminal device, or the support capability information of the second terminal device for multiple carriers. In order to make the carrier configured for the second terminal device within the capabilities of the second terminal device as much as possible, and reduce configuration failures caused by the capability of the second terminal device being unable to support it, the first terminal device can first obtain the carrier from the second terminal device. capability information.
在一种可选的实施方式中，在从所述第二终端设备接收能力信息之前，所述方法还包括：向所述第二终端设备发送能力询问信息，所述能力询问信息用于请求所述第二终端设备提供能力信息。第二终端设备可以主动向第一终端设备发送能力信息，无需第一终端设备请求，能够减小信令开销。或者，第二终端设备也可以在第一终端设备请求时再向第一终端设备发送能力信息，以减少冗余信息的发送。In an optional implementation manner, before receiving capability information from the second terminal device, the method further includes: sending capability query information to the second terminal device, where the capability query information is used to request the The second terminal device provides capability information. The second terminal device may proactively send capability information to the first terminal device without a request from the first terminal device, which can reduce signaling overhead. Alternatively, the second terminal device may also send capability information to the first terminal device when requested by the first terminal device, so as to reduce sending of redundant information.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述能力询问信息还包括如下信息中的一项或多项：带宽信息，载波数量信息，或，分离等级信息，其中，所述带宽信息用于指示所述第二终端设备提供能够支持所述带宽信息的频带或频带组合；所述载波数量信息用于指示所述第二终端设备提供能够支持所述载波数量信息的频带或频带组合；所述分离等级信息用于指示所述第二终端设备提供能够支持所述分离等级信息的频带或频带组合。能力询问信息所包括的如上一项或多项信息可以统称为筛选信息，即，通过筛选信息，可以令第二终端设备将符合该筛选信息的能力信息发送给第一终端设备，使得第一终端设备所获得的能力信息更有参考价值。In an optional implementation manner, the capability query information further includes one or more of the following information: bandwidth information, carrier number information, or separation level information, where the bandwidth information is used to indicate the The second terminal device provides a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the bandwidth information; the carrier number information is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the carrier number information; the separation level The information is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the separation level information. The above one or more items of information included in the capability query information can be collectively referred to as screening information, that is, through screening information, the second terminal device can be ordered to send capability information that meets the screening information to the first terminal device, so that the first terminal device The capability information obtained by the equipment is more valuable.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：向接入网设备发送所述能力信息。为第二终端设备配置的载波，可能由第一终端设备决定，也可能由接入网设备决定。如果由接入网设备决定，则第一终端设备可将第二终端设备的能力信息发送给接入网设备，以供接入网设备确定为第二终端设备配置哪些载波。 In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending the capability information to an access network device. The carrier configured for the second terminal device may be determined by the first terminal device, or may be determined by the access network device. If it is determined by the access network device, the first terminal device may send the capability information of the second terminal device to the access network device, so that the access network device determines which carriers are configured for the second terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，确定N种载波配置，包括：从接入网设备接收第三配置信息，所述第三配置信息用于指示所述N种载波配置。如果为第二终端设备配置的载波由接入网设备决定，则接入网设备可将第三配置信息发送给第一终端设备，从而第一终端设备能够据此确定N种载波配置，再通过第一配置信息向第二终端设备指示N种载波配置。In an optional implementation manner, determining the N types of carrier configurations includes: receiving third configuration information from an access network device, where the third configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations. If the carrier configured for the second terminal device is determined by the access network device, the access network device can send the third configuration information to the first terminal device, so that the first terminal device can determine N types of carrier configurations based on this, and then pass The first configuration information indicates N types of carrier configurations to the second terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，在确定N种载波配置之前，所述方法还包括：从所述第二终端设备接收辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于指示K种载波配置，所述K种载波配置包括的载波为所述第二终端设备期望配置的载波，其中，所述K种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，K为正整数。本申请实施例中，第二终端设备可以向第一终端设备发送能力信息和/或辅助信息。无论是能力信息还是辅助信息，都能够辅助第一终端设备或接入网设备为第二终端设备配置合适的载波，以提高配置成功率。In an optional implementation manner, before determining the N types of carrier configurations, the method further includes: receiving auxiliary information from the second terminal device, where the auxiliary information is used to indicate K types of carrier configurations, and the K The carriers included in the K carrier configurations are the carriers expected to be configured by the second terminal device, wherein each carrier configuration in the K carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device The carrier, and/or, includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and K is a positive integer. In this embodiment of the present application, the second terminal device may send capability information and/or auxiliary information to the first terminal device. Both the capability information and the auxiliary information can assist the first terminal device or the access network device to configure a suitable carrier for the second terminal device, so as to improve configuration success rate.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述N种载波配置所包括的载波是所述K种载波配置所包括的载波中的载波。例如，第一终端设备或接入网设备为第二终端设备配置的，可以是第二终端设备所期望配置的载波，这使得配置结果更为符合第二终端设备的需求，第二终端设备对此的接受概率较高，因此也能提高配置成功率。In an optional implementation manner, the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are carriers included in the K carrier configurations. For example, what the first terminal device or the access network device configures for the second terminal device may be the carrier that the second terminal device expects to configure, which makes the configuration result more in line with the needs of the second terminal device. This has a higher probability of acceptance and therefore increases the configuration success rate.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述辅助信息包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的频率信息，或包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的索引。In an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information includes frequency information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, or includes indexes of carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述辅助信息还包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的带宽信息，其中，所述K种载波配置包括的第一载波的带宽信息用于指示为所述第二终端设备配置的所述第一载波的带宽小于或等于所述带宽信息对应的带宽。辅助信息还可以指示一个载波的最大带宽，如果要为第二终端设备配置该载波，那么所配置的该载波的带宽可以小于或等于该载波的最大带宽。这样既为第二终端设备配置了合适的载波，而且该载波的参数也在第二终端设备的接受范围之内，以提高配置成功率。In an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information further includes bandwidth information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, where the bandwidth information of the first carrier included in the K carrier configurations is used to indicate the The bandwidth of the first carrier configured by the second terminal device is less than or equal to the bandwidth corresponding to the bandwidth information. The auxiliary information may also indicate the maximum bandwidth of a carrier. If the carrier is to be configured for the second terminal device, the configured bandwidth of the carrier may be less than or equal to the maximum bandwidth of the carrier. In this way, a suitable carrier is configured for the second terminal device, and the parameters of the carrier are also within the acceptance range of the second terminal device, so as to improve the configuration success rate.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述K种载波配置包括所述第二终端设备正在使用的载波。第一终端设备或接入网设备可以为第二终端设备配置第二终端设备正在使用的载波，那么第二终端设备无需在新的载波上监听/接收，而是继续在已使用的载波上继续监听/接收即可，这样能够减小第二终端设备的功耗，简化第二终端设备的实现。In an optional implementation manner, the K types of carrier configurations include the carrier being used by the second terminal device. The first terminal device or the access network device can configure the carrier used by the second terminal device for the second terminal device, then the second terminal device does not need to monitor/receive on the new carrier, but continues to continue on the used carrier It only needs to monitor/receive, which can reduce the power consumption of the second terminal device and simplify the implementation of the second terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第二终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示激活第二载波，所述第二载波是所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的载波。第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间传输的数据量可能并不均衡。例如某些时间段内可能传输的数据量较多，而某些时间段内传输的数据量较少。本申请实施例考虑到，如果第二终端设备始终在配置给第二终端设备的全部载波上监听/接收，对于第二终端设备来说功耗较大。因此本申请实施例中，第一终端设备(或接入网设备)可以根据第一终端设备与第二终端设备的通信情况，动态激活或去激活相应的载波，既保证第一终端设备与第二终端设备能够正常通信，也能减小终端设备的功耗。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending first indication information to the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate activation of a second carrier, and the second carrier is the The first carrier configuration or carriers in the part of carriers. The amount of data transmitted between the first terminal device and the second terminal device may not be balanced. For example, a large amount of data may be transmitted in certain time periods, while a small amount of data may be transmitted in certain time periods. The embodiment of the present application considers that if the second terminal device always monitors/receives on all the carriers configured for the second terminal device, the power consumption of the second terminal device is relatively high. Therefore, in this embodiment of the application, the first terminal device (or access network device) can dynamically activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier according to the communication between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, so as to ensure that the first terminal device and the second terminal device The two terminal devices can communicate normally, and the power consumption of the terminal devices can also be reduced.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：从接入网设备接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示激活所述第二载波；或，根据待传输的数据量与第一门限之间的对应关系，确定激活所述第二载波；或，根据第一参数确定激活所述第二载波，所述第一参数包括如下一项或多项：所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的业务的QoS信息、所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波的CBR信息，或，所述第一终端设备缓存的数据量信 息。可由接入网设备确定是否激活或去激活相应的载波，或者也可由第一终端设备确定是否激活或去激活相应的载波。例如第一终端设备可根据相应的参数确定是否激活或去激活相应的载波，或者第一终端设备也可以根据数据量确定是否激活或去激活相应的载波，该数据量例如为待发送给第二终端设备的数据量，使得载波激活或去激活能够符合当前的通信需求。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving second indication information from the access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate activation of the second carrier; or, according to the data to be transmitted Determine to activate the second carrier according to the corresponding relationship between the quantity and the first threshold; or, determine to activate the second carrier according to the first parameter, and the first parameter includes one or more of the following: the first The QoS information of the service between the terminal device and the second terminal device, the configuration of the first carrier or the CBR information of the partial carrier, or the data volume information buffered by the first terminal device interest. The access network device may determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier, or the first terminal device may also determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier. For example, the first terminal device can determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier according to corresponding parameters, or the first terminal device can also determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier according to the amount of data, such as the amount of data to be sent to the second The data volume of the terminal equipment, so that the carrier activation or deactivation can meet the current communication needs.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第二终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示去激活第三载波，所述第三载波是所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的载波。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending first indication information to the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate deactivation of a third carrier, and the third carrier is The first carrier configuration or carriers in the part of carriers.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：从接入网设备接收第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示去激活所述第三载波；或，根据待传输的数据量与第一门限之间的对应关系，确定去激活所述第三载波；或，根据第一参数确定去激活所述第三载波，所述第一参数包括如下一项或多项：所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的业务的QoS信息、所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波的CBR信息，或，所述第一终端设备缓存的数据量信息。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving third indication information from the access network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate deactivation of the third carrier; or, according to the to-be-transmitted According to the corresponding relationship between the amount of data and the first threshold, determine to deactivate the third carrier; or, determine to deactivate the third carrier according to the first parameter, where the first parameter includes one or more of the following: The QoS information of the service between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the configuration of the first carrier or the CBR information of the partial carrier, or the data volume information buffered by the first terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，当所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第二定时器；和/或，当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波向所述第二终端设备发送信息和/或从所述第二终端设备接收信息时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第二定时器。例如第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送了用于指示去激活第三载波的指示信息，但第二UE未收到该指示信息，则第二终端设备还会继续在第三载波上监听/接收，造成第二终端设备的功率浪费。另外，如果第一终端设备待传输的数据量较小，在某一载波上一段时间都没有向第二终端设备发送数据，但第一终端设备又没有指示去激活该载波，则第二终端设备就会一直在该载波上进行监听/接收，也造成第二终端设备的功率浪费。为此，本申请实施例中的第一终端设备和第二终端设备可以针对载波维护定时器，例如一个终端设备针对一个载波可以维护一个定时器，通过该定时器，即使在未收到指示信息的情况下终端设备也可以去激活相应的载波，从而减小终端设备的功耗。In an optional implementation manner, when the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier is activated, start or restart a second timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or , when sending information to the second terminal device and/or receiving information from the second terminal device through the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier, start or restart the connection with the fourth carrier The second timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, the first terminal device sends the instruction information for instructing to deactivate the third carrier to the second terminal device, but the second UE does not receive the instruction information, then the second terminal device will continue to listen/monitor on the third carrier reception, resulting in waste of power for the second terminal device. In addition, if the amount of data to be transmitted by the first terminal device is small and has not sent data to the second terminal device on a certain carrier for a period of time, but the first terminal device has not instructed to deactivate the carrier, the second terminal device It will always monitor/receive on the carrier, which also causes waste of power of the second terminal device. For this reason, the first terminal device and the second terminal device in the embodiment of the present application can maintain a timer for a carrier. For example, a terminal device can maintain a timer for a carrier. Through this timer, even if no indication information is received In a case where the terminal device can also deactivate the corresponding carrier, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，当通过所述第一载波配置包括的第四载波向所述第二终端设备发送信息和/或从所述第二终端设备接收所述信息时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第二定时器，包括：在向所述第二终端设备发送所述信息或从所述第二终端设备接收所述信息完毕的时刻，启动或重启所述第二定时器；或，在向所述第二终端设备发送所述信息或从所述第二终端设备接收所述信息完毕后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启所述第二定时器。关于定时器应该在何时启动或重启，此处给出了几种示例，但具体实现不限于此。In an optional implementation manner, when sending information to the second terminal device and/or receiving the information from the second terminal device through the fourth carrier included in the first carrier configuration, start or Restarting the second timer corresponding to the fourth carrier includes: starting or restarting the second timer when sending the information to the second terminal device or receiving the information from the second terminal device is completed. a second timer; or, starting or restarting the second timer in the first time unit after sending the information to the second terminal device or receiving the information from the second terminal device. Several examples are given here of when the timer should start or restart, but the implementation is not limited thereto.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：在所述第二定时器超时时，去激活所述第四载波。如果第二定时器超时，则无论第一终端设备是否接收了相应的指示信息，或者无论第一终端设备是否判定需要去激活第四载波，第一终端设备都可以去激活第四载波，以减小第一终端设备的功耗。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: deactivating the fourth carrier when the second timer expires. If the second timer expires, no matter whether the first terminal device receives the corresponding indication information, or whether the first terminal device determines that the fourth carrier needs to be deactivated, the first terminal device can deactivate the fourth carrier to reduce the The power consumption of the first terminal equipment is reduced.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：当所述第一终端设备在所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波上的第三传输功能被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第五定时器；和/或，当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波与所述第二终端设备执行第三传输功能时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第五定时器。其中， 所述第三传输功能包括所述第一终端设备从所述第二终端设备接收信息。本申请实施例中，一个终端设备针对一个载波也可以维护两个定时器，这两个定时器分别监测该终端设备在该载波上的不同的传输功能，可以实现粒度更细的控制。例如，如果其中一个定时器超时，则可以去激活该定时器所对应的传输功能，而对于该定时器未对应的传输功能则不限制，还可以继续执行。这样既能减小终端设备的功耗，也能减小对于其他传输功能的影响，提高载波的利用率以及通信成功率。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when the third transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, Start or restart a fifth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or, when the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier and the second terminal device perform a third transmission function , start or restart a fifth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier. in, The third transfer function includes the first terminal device receiving information from the second terminal device. In the embodiment of the present application, a terminal device can also maintain two timers for a carrier, and these two timers monitor different transmission functions of the terminal device on the carrier respectively, so that finer-grained control can be realized. For example, if one of the timers expires, the transmission function corresponding to the timer may be deactivated, while the transmission function not corresponding to the timer is not restricted and may continue to be executed. This can not only reduce the power consumption of the terminal equipment, but also reduce the impact on other transmission functions, and improve the carrier utilization rate and communication success rate.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：在所述第五定时器超时时，去激活所述第一终端设备在所述第四载波上的所述第三传输功能。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when the fifth timer expires, deactivating the third transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：当所述第一终端设备在所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波上的第四传输功能被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第六定时器；和/或，当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波与所述第二终端设备执行第四传输功能时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第六定时器。其中，所述第四传输功能包括所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when a fourth transmission function of the first terminal device on a fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, Start or restart the sixth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or, when the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier and the second terminal device perform a fourth transmission function , start or restart a sixth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier. Wherein, the fourth transmission function includes the first terminal device sending information to the second terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：在所述第六定时器超时时，去激活所述第一终端设备在所述第四载波上的所述第四传输功能。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when the sixth timer expires, deactivating the fourth transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier.
第二方面，提供第二种通信方法，该方法可由终端设备执行，或由包括终端设备功能的其他设备执行，或由芯片***(或，芯片)或其他功能模块执行，该芯片***或功能模块能够实现终端设备的功能，该芯片***或功能模块例如设置在终端设备中。该终端设备例如为第二终端设备。该方法包括：从第一终端设备接收第一配置信息；根据所述第一配置信息确定N种载波配置，所述N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，N为正整数。In the second aspect, a second communication method is provided, which can be executed by a terminal device, or by other devices including terminal device functions, or by a chip system (or, chip) or other functional modules, the chip system or functional modules The function of the terminal device can be realized, and the chip system or the functional module is set in the terminal device, for example. The terminal device is, for example, the second terminal device. The method includes: receiving first configuration information from a first terminal device; determining N types of carrier configurations according to the first configuration information, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes The carrier on which the second terminal device sends information, and/or includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and N is a positive integer.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述第一配置信息包括所述载波的频率信息，或包括所述载波的索引。In an optional implementation manner, the first configuration information includes frequency information of the carrier, or includes an index of the carrier.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第一终端设备发送确认信息，所述确认信息用于指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置，或指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置包括的部分载波；或，向所述第一终端设备发送拒绝信息，所述拒绝信息用于指示所述第二终端设备拒绝所述N种载波配置；或，向所述第一终端设备发送第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于指示所述第二终端设备期望的载波配置。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending confirmation information to the first terminal device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the second terminal device to accept the first of the N types of carrier configurations. Carrier configuration, or instruct the second terminal device to accept part of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration of the N types of carrier configurations; or, send rejection information to the first terminal device, where the rejection information is used to indicate the The second terminal device rejects the N types of carrier configurations; or, sends second configuration information to the first terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the desired carrier configuration of the second terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，在从第一终端设备接收第一配置信息之前，所述方法还包括：向所述第一终端设备发送所述第二终端设备的能力信息，所述能力信息包括如下一项或多项：所述第二终端设备支持的频带信息，所述第二终端设备支持的频带组合信息，或，所述第二终端设备对于多载波的支持能力信息。In an optional implementation manner, before receiving the first configuration information from the first terminal device, the method further includes: sending capability information of the second terminal device to the first terminal device, the capability The information includes one or more of the following: frequency band information supported by the second terminal device, frequency band combination information supported by the second terminal device, or information on the support capability of the second terminal device for multiple carriers.
在一种可选的实施方式中，在向所述第一终端设备发送所述第二终端设备的能力信息之前，所述方法还包括：从所述第一终端设备接收能力询问信息，所述能力询问信息用于请求所述第二终端设备提供能力信息。In an optional implementation manner, before sending the capability information of the second terminal device to the first terminal device, the method further includes: receiving capability query information from the first terminal device, the The capability query information is used to request the second terminal device to provide capability information.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述能力询问信息还包括如下信息中的一项或多项：带宽信息，载波数量信息，或，分离等级信息，其中，所述带宽信息用于指示所述第二终端设备提供能够支持所述带宽信息的频带或频带组合；所述载波数量信息用于指示所述第二终 端设备提供能够支持所述载波数量信息的频带或频带组合；所述分离等级信息用于指示所述第二终端设备提供能够支持所述分离等级信息的频带或频带组合。In an optional implementation manner, the capability query information further includes one or more of the following information: bandwidth information, carrier number information, or separation level information, where the bandwidth information is used to indicate the The second terminal device provides a frequency band or frequency band combination that can support the bandwidth information; the carrier number information is used to indicate that the second terminal The terminal device provides a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the carrier quantity information; the separation level information is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the separation level information.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：向所述第一终端设备发送辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于指示K种载波配置，所述K种载波配置包括的载波为所述第二终端设备期望配置的载波，其中，所述K种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，K为正整数。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: sending auxiliary information to the first terminal device, where the auxiliary information is used to indicate K types of carrier configurations, and the carriers included in the K types of carrier configurations are all The carrier desired to be configured by the second terminal device, wherein each of the K carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes The carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, K is a positive integer.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述N种载波配置所包括的载波是所述K种载波配置所包括的载波中的载波。In an optional implementation manner, the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述辅助信息包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的频率信息，或包括K种载波配置包括的所述载波的索引。In an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information includes frequency information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, or includes indexes of the carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述辅助信息还包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的带宽信息，其中，所述K种载波配置包括的第一载波的带宽信息用于指示为所述第二终端设备配置的所述第一载波的带宽小于或等于所述带宽信息对应的带宽。In an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information further includes bandwidth information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, where the bandwidth information of the first carrier included in the K carrier configurations is used to indicate the The bandwidth of the first carrier configured by the second terminal device is less than or equal to the bandwidth corresponding to the bandwidth information.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述K种载波配置包括所述第二终端设备正在使用的载波。In an optional implementation manner, the K types of carrier configurations include the carrier being used by the second terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第二终端设备接收第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示激活第二载波，或用于指示去激活第三载波，所述第二载波或所述第三载波是所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的载波。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving first indication information from the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate activation of the second carrier, or to indicate deactivation of the second carrier. For three carriers, the second carrier or the third carrier is a carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：当所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第一定时器；和/或，当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波从所述第一终端设备接收信息和/或向所述第一终端设备发送信息时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第一定时器。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the part of carriers is activated, starting or restarting the first carrier corresponding to the fourth carrier a timer; and/or, when receiving information from the first terminal device and/or sending information to the first terminal device through the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier, start or Restart the first timer corresponding to the fourth carrier.
在一种可选的实施方式中，当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波从所述第一终端设备接收信息和/或向所述第一终端设备发送信息时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第一定时器，包括：在从所述第一终端设备接收所述信息或向所述第一终端设备发送所述信息完毕的时刻，启动或重启所述第一定时器；或，在从所述第一终端设备接收所述信息或向所述第一终端设备发送所述信息完毕后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启所述第一定时器。In an optional implementation manner, when receiving information from the first terminal device and/or sending information to the first terminal device through the first carrier configuration or the fourth carrier in the partial carrier , starting or restarting the first timer corresponding to the fourth carrier, including: starting or restarting at the moment when the information is received from the first terminal device or the information is sent to the first terminal device. The first timer; or, starting or restarting the first timer in the first time unit after receiving the information from the first terminal device or sending the information to the first terminal device device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：在所述第一定时器超时时，去激活所述第四载波。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: deactivating the fourth carrier when the first timer expires.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：当所述第二终端设备在所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波上的第一传输功能被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第三定时器；和/或，当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波与所述第一终端设备执行第一传输功能时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第三定时器。其中，所述第一传输功能包括所述第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when the first transmission function of the second terminal device on the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, Start or restart the third timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or, when the first terminal device performs the first transmission function through the first carrier configuration or the fourth carrier in the partial carrier , start or restart a third timer corresponding to the fourth carrier. Wherein, the first transmission function includes the second terminal device sending information to the first terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：在所述第三定时器超时时，去激活所述第二终端设备在所述第四载波上的所述第一传输功能。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when the third timer expires, deactivating the first transmission function of the second terminal device on the fourth carrier.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：当所述第二终端设备在所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波上的第二传输功能被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第四定时器；和/或，当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波与所述 第二终端设备执行第二传输功能时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第四定时器。其中，所述第二传输功能包括所述第二终端设备从所述第一终端设备接收信息。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when a second transmission function of the second terminal device on a fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, Start or restart a fourth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or, when the first carrier is configured or the fourth carrier in the partial carrier is connected to the When the second terminal device executes the second transmission function, start or restart a fourth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier. Wherein, the second transmission function includes the second terminal device receiving information from the first terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：在所述第四定时器超时时，去激活所述第二终端设备在所述第四载波上的所述第二传输功能。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: when the fourth timer expires, deactivating the second transmission function of the second terminal device on the fourth carrier.
关于第二方面或各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第一方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought about by the second aspect or various optional implementation manners, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the first aspect or corresponding implementation manners.
第三方面，提供第三种通信方法，该方法可由接入网设备执行，或由包括接入网设备功能的其他设备执行，或由芯片***(或，芯片)或其他功能模块执行，该芯片***或功能模块能够实现接入网设备的功能，该芯片***或功能模块例如设置在接入网设备中。可选的，接入网设备例如为基站等。该方法包括：确定N种载波配置，所述N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，N为正整数；向第一终端设备发送第三配置信息，所述第三配置信息用于指示所述N种载波配置。In the third aspect, a third communication method is provided, which can be executed by access network equipment, or by other equipment including access network equipment functions, or by a chip system (or, chip) or other functional modules, the chip The system or functional module can realize the function of the access network equipment, and the chip system or functional module is set in the access network equipment, for example. Optionally, the access network device is, for example, a base station. The method includes: determining N types of carrier configurations, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier for the second terminal device The terminal device sends information carriers to the first terminal device, where N is a positive integer; and sends third configuration information to the first terminal device, where the third configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述第三配置信息包括所述载波的频率信息，或包括所述载波的索引。In an optional implementation manner, the third configuration information includes frequency information of the carrier, or includes an index of the carrier.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：从所述第一终端设备接收确认信息，所述确认信息用于指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置，或指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置包括的部分载波；或，从所述第一终端设备接收拒绝信息，所述拒绝信息用于指示所述第二终端设备拒绝所述N种载波配置；或，从所述第一终端设备接收第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于指示所述第二终端设备期望的载波配置。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving confirmation information from the first terminal device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the second terminal device to accept the first of the N types of carrier configurations. Carrier configuration, or instructing the second terminal device to accept part of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration of the N types of carrier configurations; or, receiving rejection information from the first terminal device, where the rejection information is used to indicate the The second terminal device rejects the N types of carrier configurations; or, receiving second configuration information from the first terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the desired carrier configuration of the second terminal device.
在一种可选的实施方式中，在确定N种载波配置之前，所述方法还包括：从所述第一终端设备接收能力信息，所述能力信息包括如下一项或多项：所述第二终端设备支持的频带信息，所述第二终端设备支持的频带组合信息，或，所述第二终端设备对于多载波的支持能力信息。In an optional implementation manner, before determining the N types of carrier configurations, the method further includes: receiving capability information from the first terminal device, where the capability information includes one or more of the following: the first The frequency band information supported by the second terminal device, the frequency band combination information supported by the second terminal device, or the support capability information of the second terminal device for multiple carriers.
在一种可选的实施方式中，在确定N种载波配置之前，所述方法还包括：从所述第一终端设备接收所述第二终端设备的辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于指示K种载波配置，所述K种载波配置包括的载波为所述第二终端设备期望配置的载波，其中，所述K种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，K为正整数。In an optional implementation manner, before determining the N types of carrier configurations, the method further includes: receiving auxiliary information of the second terminal device from the first terminal device, where the auxiliary information is used to indicate K Carrier configurations, the carriers included in the K carrier configurations are the carriers expected to be configured by the second terminal device, wherein each carrier configuration in the K carrier configurations includes The carrier for the second terminal device to send information, and/or, includes a carrier for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and K is a positive integer.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述N种载波配置所包括的载波是所述K种载波配置所包括的载波中的载波。In an optional implementation manner, the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述辅助信息包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的频率信息，或包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的索引。In an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information includes frequency information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, or includes indexes of carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述辅助信息还包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的带宽信息，其中，所述K种载波配置包括的第一载波的带宽信息用于指示为所述第二终端设备配置的所述第一载波的带宽小于或等于所述带宽信息对应的带宽。In an optional implementation manner, the auxiliary information further includes bandwidth information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, where the bandwidth information of the first carrier included in the K carrier configurations is used to indicate the The bandwidth of the first carrier configured by the second terminal device is less than or equal to the bandwidth corresponding to the bandwidth information.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：根据第一参数确定激活第二载波，所述第二载波是所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的载波，所述第一参数包括如下一项或多项：所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的业务的QoS信息、所述第一载波配置或 所述部分载波的CBR信息，或，所述第一终端设备缓存的数据量信息；向所述第一终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示激活所述第二载波。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: determining to activate a second carrier according to a first parameter, where the second carrier is a carrier in the configuration of the first carrier or a carrier in the partial carrier, and the second carrier A parameter includes one or more of the following: QoS information of services between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the configuration of the first carrier, or The CBR information of the part of the carrier, or the data volume information buffered by the first terminal device; sending second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate activation of the second carrier .
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：根据第一参数确定去激活第三载波，所述第三载波是所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的载波，所述第一参数包括如下一项或多项：所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的业务的QoS信息、所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波的CBR信息，或，所述第一终端设备缓存的数据量信息；向所述第一终端设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示去激活所述第三载波。In an optional implementation manner, the method further includes: determining to deactivate a third carrier according to a first parameter, where the third carrier is a carrier in the configuration of the first carrier or in the partial carrier, the The first parameter includes one or more of the following: QoS information of services between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, configuration of the first carrier or CBR information of the partial carrier, or, the The data volume information cached by the first terminal device; and sending second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to instruct deactivation of the third carrier.
关于第三方面或各种可选的实施方式所带来的技术效果，可参考对于第一方面或相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。Regarding the technical effects brought by the third aspect or various optional implementation manners, reference may be made to the introduction of the technical effects of the first aspect or corresponding implementation manners.
第四方面，提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第三方面的任一方面所述的第一终端设备。所述通信装置具备上述第一终端设备的功能。所述通信装置例如为第一终端设备，或为第一终端设备中的功能模块，例如基带装置或芯片***(或，芯片)等。或者，所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第三方面的任一方面所述的第二终端设备。所述通信装置具备上述第二终端设备的功能。所述通信装置例如为第二终端设备，或为第二终端设备中的功能模块，例如基带装置或芯片***(或，芯片)等。一种可选的实现方式中，所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可选的实现方式中，所述通信装置包括处理单元(有时也称为处理模块)和收发单元(有时也称为收发模块)。收发单元能够实现发送功能和接收功能，在收发单元实现发送功能时，可称为发送单元(有时也称为发送模块)，在收发单元实现接收功能时，可称为接收单元(有时也称为接收模块)。发送单元和接收单元可以是同一个功能模块，该功能模块称为收发单元，该功能模块能实现发送功能和接收功能；或者，发送单元和接收单元可以是不同的功能模块，收发单元是对这些功能模块的统称。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be the first terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect. The communication device has the function of the above-mentioned first terminal device. The communication device is, for example, the first terminal device, or a functional module in the first terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system (or, chip), and the like. Alternatively, the communication device may be the second terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect. The communication device has the function of the above-mentioned second terminal device. The communication device is, for example, the second terminal device, or a functional module in the second terminal device, such as a baseband device or a chip system (or, chip), and the like. In an optional implementation manner, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. In another optional implementation manner, the communication device includes a processing unit (also called a processing module sometimes) and a transceiver unit (also called a transceiver module sometimes). The transceiver unit can realize the sending function and the receiving function. When the transceiver unit realizes the sending function, it can be called the sending unit (sometimes also called the sending module). When the transceiver unit realizes the receiving function, it can be called the receiving unit (sometimes also called receiving module). The sending unit and the receiving unit can be the same functional module, which is called the transceiver unit, and this functional module can realize the sending function and the receiving function; or, the sending unit and the receiving unit can be different functional modules, and the transceiver unit is for these A general term for functional modules.
例如在所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第三方面的任一方面所述的第一终端设备时，所述处理单元，用于确定N种载波配置，所述N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，N为正整数；所述收发单元(或，所述发送单元)，用于向所述第二终端设备发送第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于指示所述N种载波配置。For example, when the communication device can be the first terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect above, the processing unit is configured to determine N types of carrier configurations, and the N types of carrier configurations Each carrier configuration includes a carrier used for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and N is a positive integer ; The transceiving unit (or, the sending unit) is configured to send first configuration information to the second terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
又例如，在所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第三方面的任一方面所述的第二终端设备时，所述收发单元(或，所述接收单元)，用于从第一终端设备接收第一配置信息；所述处理单元，用于根据所述第一配置信息确定N种载波配置，所述N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，N为正整数。For another example, when the communication device can be the second terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect above, the transceiver unit (or, the receiving unit) is configured to receive from the first terminal The device receives first configuration information; the processing unit is configured to determine N types of carrier configurations according to the first configuration information, and each carrier configuration in the N types of carrier configurations includes a The carrier for the second terminal device to send information, and/or, includes a carrier for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and N is a positive integer.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述通信装置还包括存储单元(有时也称为存储模块)，所述处理单元用于与所述存储单元耦合，并执行所述存储单元中的程序或指令，使能所述通信装置执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面所述的第一终端设备或第二终端设备的功能。In an optional implementation manner, the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also referred to as a storage module), and the processing unit is used to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program or An instruction to enable the communication device to execute the function of the first terminal device or the second terminal device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
第五方面，提供一种通信装置。所述通信装置可以为上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面所述的接入网设备。所述通信装置具备上述接入网设备的功能。所述通信装置例如为接入网设备，或为接入网设备中的功能模块，例如基带装置或芯片***(或，芯片)等。一种可选的实现方式中，所述通信装置包括基带装置和射频装置。另一种可选的实现方式 中，所述通信装置包括处理单元(有时也称为处理模块)和收发单元(有时也称为收发模块)。关于收发单元的实现方式可参考第四方面的介绍。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided. The communication device may be the access network device described in any one of the above first to third aspects. The communication device has the functions of the above-mentioned access network equipment. The communication device is, for example, an access network device, or a functional module in the access network device, such as a baseband device or a chip system (or chip). In an optional implementation manner, the communication device includes a baseband device and a radio frequency device. Another optional implementation In, the communication device includes a processing unit (sometimes also called a processing module) and a transceiver unit (sometimes also called a transceiver module). Regarding the implementation of the transceiver unit, reference may be made to the introduction of the fourth aspect.
例如，所述处理单元，用于确定N种载波配置，所述N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，N为正整数；所述收发单元(或，所述接收单元)，用于向第一终端设备发送第三配置信息，所述第三配置信息用于指示所述N种载波配置。For example, the processing unit is configured to determine N types of carrier configurations, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or, Including a carrier for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, N is a positive integer; the transceiver unit (or, the receiving unit) is used to send third configuration information to the first terminal device, The third configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
在一种可选的实施方式中，所述通信装置还包括存储单元(有时也称为存储模块)，所述处理单元用于与所述存储单元耦合，并执行所述存储单元中的程序或指令，使能所述通信装置执行上述第一方面至第三方面中的任一方面所述的接入网设备的功能。In an optional implementation manner, the communication device further includes a storage unit (sometimes also referred to as a storage module), and the processing unit is used to be coupled with the storage unit and execute the program or An instruction to enable the communication device to perform the function of the access network device described in any one of the first aspect to the third aspect.
第六方面，提供一种通信***，包括第四方面所述的通信装置和第五方面所述的通信装置。A sixth aspect provides a communication system, including the communication device described in the fourth aspect and the communication device described in the fifth aspect.
第七方面，提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序或指令，当其被运行时，使得上述各方面中第一终端设备、第二终端设备或接入网设备所执行的方法被实现。In a seventh aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer programs or instructions, and when executed, the first terminal device, the second terminal device, or the interface in the above-mentioned aspects The method performed by the network access device is implemented.
第八方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得上述各方面所述的方法被实现。In an eighth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which enables the methods described in the above aspects to be implemented when it is run on a computer.
第九方面，提供一种芯片***或芯片，包括处理器和接口，所述处理器用于从所述接口调用并运行指令，以使所述芯片***实现上述各方面的方法。According to a ninth aspect, a chip system or chip is provided, including a processor and an interface, and the processor is configured to call and execute instructions from the interface, so that the chip system implements the methods in the above aspects.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为本申请实施例的一种应用场景示意图；FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application;
图2和图3为本申请实施例提供的两种通信方法的流程图；FIG. 2 and FIG. 3 are flowcharts of two communication methods provided by the embodiments of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意图；FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的又一种装置的示意图。Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of another device provided by the embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。In order to make the purpose, technical solutions, and advantages of the embodiments of the present application clearer, the embodiments of the present application will be further described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
以下，对本申请实施例中的部分用语或概念进行解释说明，以便于本领域技术人员理解。In the following, some terms or concepts in the embodiments of the present application are explained, so as to facilitate the understanding of those skilled in the art.
本申请实施例涉及发送设备和接收设备，例如，发送设备和接收设备均为终端设备。终端设备是一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以是固定设备，移动设备、手持设备(例如手机)、穿戴设备、车载设备，或内置于上述设备中的无线装置(例如，通信模块，调制解调器，或芯片***等)。所述终端设备用于连接人，物，机器等，可广泛用于各种场景，例如包括但不限于以下场景：蜂窝通信、设备到设备通信(device-to-device，D2D)、车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications，M2M/MTC)、物联网(internet of things，IoT)、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self driving)、远程医疗(remote medical)、智能电网(smart grid)、智能家具、 智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通，智慧城市(smart city)、无人机、机器人等场景的终端设备。所述终端设备有时可称为UE、终端、接入站、UE站、远方站、无线通信设备、或用户装置等等。为描述方便，本申请实施例中将终端设备以UE为例进行说明，例如，后文所涉及的第一UE可用第一终端设备替换，后文所涉及的第二UE可用第二终端设备替换。The embodiment of the present application relates to a sending device and a receiving device, for example, both the sending device and the receiving device are terminal devices. A terminal device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, which can be a fixed device, a mobile device, a handheld device (such as a mobile phone), a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wireless device built into the above-mentioned devices (such as a communication module, a modem, or system-on-a-chip, etc.). The terminal device is used to connect people, objects, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, including but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D), car-to-everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC), internet of things (IoT), virtual reality (VR) , augmented reality (augmented reality, AR), industrial control (industrial control), driverless (self driving), telemedicine (remote medical), smart grid (smart grid), smart furniture, Terminal equipment for smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, smart city, drones, robots and other scenarios. The terminal device may sometimes be called a UE, terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication device, or user device, among others. For the convenience of description, in this embodiment of the application, the terminal device is taken as an example for description. For example, the first UE mentioned below can be replaced by the first terminal device, and the second UE mentioned below can be replaced by the second terminal device. .
本申请实施例中的网络设备，例如可以包括接入网设备，和/或核心网设备。所述接入网设备为具有无线收发功能的设备，用于与所述终端设备进行通信。所述接入网设备包括但不限于基站(基站收发信站点(base transceiver station，BTS)，Node B,eNodeB/eNB，或gNodeB/gNB)、收发点(transmission reception point，TRP)，第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)后续演进的基站，无线保真(wireless fidelity，Wi-Fi)***中的接入节点，无线中继节点，无线回传节点等。所述基站可以是：宏基站，微基站，微微基站，小站，中继站等。多个基站可以支持同一种接入技术的网络，也可以支持不同接入技术的网络。基站可以包含一个或多个共站或非共站的传输接收点。所述接入网设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network，CRAN)场景下的无线控制器、集中单元(centralized unit，CU)，和/或分布单元(distributed unit，DU)。所述接入网设备还可以是服务器等。例如，车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)技术中的网络设备可以为路侧单元(road side unit，RSU)。以下以接入网设备为基站为例进行说明。基站可以与终端设备进行通信，也可以通过中继站与终端设备进行通信。终端设备可以与不同接入技术中的多个基站进行通信。所述核心网设备用于实现移动管理，数据处理，会话管理，策略和计费等功能。不同接入技术的***中实现核心网功能的设备名称可以不同，本申请实施例并不对此进行限定。以第五代(the 5th generation，5G)移动通信***为例，所述核心网设备包括：访问和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function，AMF)、会话管理功能(session management function，SMF)、策略控制功能(policy control function，PCF)或用户面功能(user plane function，UPF)等。The network devices in this embodiment of the present application may include, for example, access network devices and/or core network devices. The access network device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, and is used for communicating with the terminal device. The access network equipment includes but is not limited to a base station (base transceiver station (BTS), Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB), a transmission reception point (TRP), a third generation 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) subsequent evolution base station, wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, Wi-Fi) system access node, wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, etc. The base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, and the like. Multiple base stations can support networks of the same access technology or networks of different access technologies. A base station may contain one or more co-sited or non-co-sited transmission and reception points. The access network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), and/or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario. The access network device may also be a server or the like. For example, a network device in a vehicle to everything (V2X) technology may be a road side unit (RSU). The following takes the access network device as a base station as an example for description. The base station can communicate with the terminal equipment, and can also communicate with the terminal equipment through the relay station. A terminal device can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies. The core network equipment is used to implement functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and charging. The names of devices implementing core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Taking the fifth generation (the 5th generation, 5G) mobile communication system as an example, the core network equipment includes: access and mobility management function (access and mobility management function, AMF), session management function (session management function, SMF), Policy control function (policy control function, PCF) or user plane function (user plane function, UPF), etc.
本申请实施例中，用于实现网络设备功能的通信装置可以是网络设备，也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片***，该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiment of the present application, the communication device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device. In the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the network device as an example for realizing the function of the network device.
5G基于临近的服务使能(proximity based services-enabled，5G ProSe-enabled)UE，是支持5G ProSe需求和相关流程的UE。5G proximity based services-enabled (5G ProSe-enabled) UE is a UE that supports 5G ProSe requirements and related procedures.
5G ProSe直接通信(5G ProSe direct communication)，是在邻近的两个或多个5G ProSe-enabled UE之间的通信。在该通信过程中，用户面的传输使用新空口(new radio，NR)技术，两个ProSe-enabled UE之间的通信路径不穿越任何网络节点。5G ProSe direct communication (5G ProSe direct communication) is communication between two or more adjacent 5G ProSe-enabled UEs. During the communication process, the transmission of the user plane uses new radio (NR) technology, and the communication path between two ProSe-enabled UEs does not traverse any network nodes.
V2X通信(communication)，利用Uu接口和/或PC5参考点(或，PC5接口)支持V2X服务的通信。V2X服务通过各种类型的V2X应用实现，例如车对车(vehicle-to-vehicle，V2V)、车对行人(vehicle-to-pedestrian，V2P)、车对基础设施(vehicle-to-infrastructure，V2I)或车对网络(vehicle-to-network，V2N)等。V2X communication (communication), using Uu interface and/or PC5 reference point (or, PC5 interface) to support communication of V2X service. V2X services are realized through various types of V2X applications, such as vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), vehicle-to-pedestrian (V2P), vehicle-to-infrastructure (V2I) ) or vehicle-to-network (V2N), etc.
PC5参考点(或，PC5接口)，为UE之间的参考点(或，接口)。The PC5 reference point (or, PC5 interface) is a reference point (or, interface) between UEs.
Uu参考点(或，Uu接口)，为UE与无线接入网络(例如，下一代(next generation，NG)-无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)，或E-UTRAN等)之间的参考点(或，接口)。 The Uu reference point (or Uu interface) is the connection between the UE and the radio access network (for example, next generation (next generation, NG)-radio access network (radio access network, RAN), or E-UTRAN, etc.) Reference point (or, interface).
NR SL通信(NR sidelink communication)，是在两个或多个邻近的UE之间实现V2X通信和5G ProSe直接通信的接入层(access stratum，AS)功能。NR sidelink communication应用NR技术，但UE之间的通信路径不穿越任何网络节点。NR SL communication (NR sidelink communication) is an access stratum (AS) function that realizes V2X communication and 5G ProSe direct communication between two or more adjacent UEs. NR sidelink communication applies NR technology, but the communication path between UEs does not traverse any network nodes.
SL传输是在一对源(source)和目标(destination)之间进行的。source可以用源层2身份号(source layer-2ID)来标识，destination可以用目标层2身份号(destination layer-2ID)来标识。source layer-2ID用于标识在SL通信中的数据的发送端(sender)UE，destination layer-2ID用于标识在SL通信中数据的目标端(target)UE或者数据的接收端UE。发送端指的是SL通信(或者是一个媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)协议数据单元(protocol data unit，PDU))的source，接收端指的是SL通信(或者是一个MAC PDU)的destination。SL transmission is between a pair of source (source) and target (destination). The source can be identified by the source layer 2 ID (source layer-2ID), and the destination can be identified by the destination layer 2 ID (destination layer-2ID). The source layer-2ID is used to identify the data sender (sender) UE in the SL communication, and the destination layer-2ID is used to identify the data target (target) UE or the data receiver UE in the SL communication. The sender refers to the source of SL communication (or a media access control (media access control, MAC) protocol data unit (protocol data unit, PDU)), and the receiver refers to SL communication (or a MAC PDU) the destination.
后文所描述的UE，可以是指使用Layer-2ID的UE，该UE在SL通信中使用该Layer-2ID。The UE described below may refer to a UE using a Layer-2 ID, and the UE uses the Layer-2 ID in SL communication.
SL通信包括单播通信模式。对于SL单播通信，PC5-无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)连接(connection)是在一个source和destination对(the source and destination pair)之间的逻辑连接。该连接被认为是在相应的PC5单播链路建立后建立的，PC5-RRC连接和PC5单播链路可以一一对应。一个UE可以与一个或多个UE之间建立PC5-RRC连接，其中的一个PC5-RRC连接用于一对source Layer-2ID和destination Layer-2ID。SL communication includes a unicast communication mode. For SL unicast communication, a PC5-radio resource control (RRC) connection (connection) is a logical connection between a source and destination pair (the source and destination pair). The connection is considered to be established after the corresponding PC5 unicast link is established, and the PC5-RRC connection and the PC5 unicast link may correspond one-to-one. A UE can establish a PC5-RRC connection with one or more UEs, and one of the PC5-RRC connections is used for a pair of source Layer-2ID and destination Layer-2ID.
本申请实施例中，对于名词的数目，除非特别说明，表示“单数名词或复数名词”，即"一个或多个”。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。例如，A/B，表示：A或B。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个)，表示：a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,或a和b和c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。In the embodiments of the present application, for the number of nouns, unless otherwise specified, it means "singular noun or plural noun", that is, "one or more". "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one item (piece) of a, b, or c means: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的大小、内容、顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度等。例如，第一信息和第二信息，可以是同一个信息，也可以是不同的信息，且，这种名称也并不是表示这两个信息的内容、信息量大小、优先级或者重要程度等的不同。另外，本申请所介绍的各个实施例中对于步骤的编号，只是为了区分不同的步骤，并不用于限定步骤之间的先后顺序。例如，S201可以发生在S202之前，或者可能发生在S202之后，或者也可能与S202同时发生。The ordinal numerals such as "first" and "second" mentioned in this embodiment of the application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, content, order, timing, priority, or importance of multiple objects. For example, the first information and the second information may be the same information or different information, and this name does not indicate the content, amount of information, priority or importance of the two information. different. In addition, the numbering of the steps in the various embodiments introduced in this application is only for distinguishing different steps, and is not used to limit the order of the steps. For example, S201 may occur before S202, or may occur after S202, or may occur simultaneously with S202.
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可以应用于D2D场景，例如新空口(new radio，NR)-D2D场景等，或者可以应用于车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)场景，例如NR-V2X场景等。例如可应用于车联网，例如V2X、车与车(vehicle-to-vehicle，V2V)等，或可用于智能驾驶、辅助驾驶、或智能网联车等领域。The technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to D2D scenarios, such as new radio (new radio, NR)-D2D scenarios, etc., or can be applied to vehicle to everything (V2X) scenarios, such as NR-V2X scenarios, etc. . For example, it can be applied to the Internet of Vehicles, such as V2X, vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V), etc., or can be used in fields such as intelligent driving, assisted driving, or intelligent networked vehicles.
请参考图1，为本申请实施例的一种应用场景示意图。图1包括UE1和UE2，例如UE1可以向UE2发送数据，则UE1为发送端，UE2为接收端，和/或，UE2可以向UE1发送数据，则UE2为发送端，UE1为接收端。图1中的UE1和UE2均以手机为例，实际不限于此。Please refer to FIG. 1 , which is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application. Figure 1 includes UE1 and UE2. For example, if UE1 can send data to UE2, UE1 is the sending end, and UE2 is the receiving end, and/or, if UE2 can send data to UE1, then UE2 is the sending end, and UE1 is the receiving end. Both UE1 and UE2 in FIG. 1 take a mobile phone as an example, and are not limited to this in practice.
为了更好地介绍本申请实施例，下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例所提供的方法。在本申请的各个实施例对应的附图中，凡是可选的步骤均用虚线表示。本申请的各个实施例所 提供的方法均可应用于图1所示的场景，例如，本申请的各个实施例所涉及的第一UE，可以是图1中的UE1；本申请的各个实施例所涉及的第二UE，可以是图1中的UE2。In order to better introduce the embodiments of the present application, the method provided by the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings corresponding to various embodiments of the present application, all optional steps are indicated by dotted lines. The various embodiments of the application The provided methods can all be applied to the scenario shown in FIG. 1. For example, the first UE involved in each embodiment of the present application may be UE1 in FIG. 1; the second UE involved in each embodiment of the present application, It may be UE2 in FIG. 1 .
本申请的各个实施例可应用于单载波的场景，即，为一个UE配置一个载波。或者，本申请的各个实施例也可以适用于多载波的场景，即，为一个UE可配置多个载波，例如UE可支持侧链路载波聚合，由此能够实现更高的数据传输速率。Various embodiments of the present application are applicable to a single carrier scenario, that is, one carrier is configured for one UE. Alternatively, various embodiments of the present application may also be applicable to a multi-carrier scenario, that is, multiple carriers may be configured for a UE, for example, the UE may support side link carrier aggregation, thereby achieving a higher data transmission rate.
另外，本申请的各个实施例中，第一UE和第二UE之间传输的信息，可以是第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project，3GPP)协议下的信息，例如侧行信息(或者称为侧链路信息等)；或者也可以是其他通信协议下的信息，例如无线保真(wireless fidelity，WiFi)信息或蓝牙信息等。相应的，本申请的各个实施例所述的载波，可以是用于UE之间通信的载波，所述载波与第一UE与第二UE适用的通信协议对应。例如第一UE与第二UE之间传输的信息为侧行信息，则所述载波也可称为侧行载波或侧链载波等。在本申请的各个实施例中，如无特殊说明，则主要以第一UE与第二UE之间传输侧行信息为例。In addition, in various embodiments of the present application, the information transmitted between the first UE and the second UE may be information under the 3rd generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) protocol, such as side line information (or It may also be information under other communication protocols, such as wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) information or Bluetooth information. Correspondingly, the carrier described in each embodiment of the present application may be a carrier used for communication between UEs, and the carrier corresponds to a communication protocol applicable to the first UE and the second UE. For example, the information transmitted between the first UE and the second UE is sidelink information, and the carrier may also be called a sidelink carrier or a sidechain carrier. In each embodiment of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the transmission of sidelink information between the first UE and the second UE is mainly taken as an example.
请参考图2，为本申请实施例提供的第一种通信方法的流程图。Please refer to FIG. 2 , which is a flow chart of the first communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
S201、第一UE确定N种载波配置，N为正整数。S201. The first UE determines N types of carrier configurations, where N is a positive integer.
其中，N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息的载波。例如，N种载波配置中的一种载波配置可称为第一载波配置，第一载波配置可包括M个载波，这M个载波可包括用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息的载波(或者描述为，用于第二UE接收来自第一UE的信息的载波)，和/或，包括用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息的载波(或者描述为，用于第一UE接收来自第二UE的信息的载波)。其中，M为正整数。Each of the N carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first UE to send information to the second UE, and/or includes a carrier for the second UE to send information to the first UE. For example, one of the N types of carrier configurations may be referred to as a first carrier configuration, and the first carrier configuration may include M carriers, and the M carriers may include carriers used for the first UE to send information to the second UE ( Or described as a carrier used for the second UE to receive information from the first UE), and/or, including a carrier used for the second UE to send information to the first UE (or described as, used for the first UE to receive information from the carrier of the information of the second UE). Wherein, M is a positive integer.
如果N大于1，则N种载波配置除了包括第一载波配置外还包括其他载波配置，例如N种载波配置中的每种载波配置均可配置用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息的载波，和/或用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息的载波。N种载波配置中的不同载波配置所包括的载波可以不同，这里的载波不同可体现为如下一项或多项：载波数量不同，载波用途不同，或，具体的载波不同(或者说载波的频率不同)。例如，N种载波配置中的两种载波配置为载波配置1(例如载波配置1即为第一载波配置)和载波配置2，载波配置1包括M个载波，载波配置2包括Q个载波，M不等于Q，这表明两种载波配置包括的载波数量不同。又例如，载波配置1包括M个载波，载波配置2也包括M个载波，但载波配置1包括的M个载波中，有M1个载波用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息，以及有M2个载波用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息，M1+M2＝M；而载波配置2包括的M个载波均用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息，这表明两种载波配置所包括的载波的用途不同。再例如，载波配置1包括M个载波，载波配置2也包括M个载波，载波配置1所包括的M个载波中包括载波1，但载波配置2所包括的M个载波中不包括载波1，这表明两种载波配置所包括的具体载波(或者说，载波的频率)不同。If N is greater than 1, the N types of carrier configurations include other carrier configurations in addition to the first carrier configuration, for example, each of the N types of carrier configurations can be configured as a carrier for the first UE to send information to the second UE , and/or a carrier used for the second UE to send information to the first UE. The carriers included in the different carrier configurations in the N carrier configurations may be different, and the carrier difference here may be reflected in one or more of the following: the number of carriers is different, the purpose of the carriers is different, or the specific carrier is different (or the frequency of the carrier different). For example, two carrier configurations in the N carrier configurations are carrier configuration 1 (for example, carrier configuration 1 is the first carrier configuration) and carrier configuration 2, carrier configuration 1 includes M carriers, carrier configuration 2 includes Q carriers, M is not equal to Q, which indicates that the two carrier configurations include different numbers of carriers. For another example, carrier configuration 1 includes M carriers, and carrier configuration 2 also includes M carriers, but among the M carriers included in carrier configuration 1, M1 carriers are used for the first UE to send information to the second UE, and there are M 2 carriers are used for the second UE to send information to the first UE, M 1 +M 2 =M; while the M carriers included in carrier configuration 2 are all used for the first UE to send information to the second UE, which means that both The usage of the carriers included in the carrier configuration is different. For another example, carrier configuration 1 includes M carriers, carrier configuration 2 also includes M carriers, carrier 1 is included in the M carriers included in carrier configuration 1, but carrier 1 is not included in the M carriers included in carrier configuration 2, This indicates that specific carriers (or frequencies of carriers) included in the two carrier configurations are different.
作为一种可选的实施方式，N种载波配置可由第一UE自行确定。例如第一UE可根据第一UE所使用的载波确定N种载波配置。As an optional implementation manner, the N types of carrier configurations may be determined by the first UE itself. For example, the first UE may determine N carrier configurations according to the carrier used by the first UE.
作为另一种可选的实施方式，N种载波配置也可由第一接入网设备确定，第一接入网设备为第一UE的服务接入网设备。第一接入网设备可向第一UE发送第三配置信息，第三配置信息可指示N种载波配置。第一UE接收了第三配置信息，也就确定了N种载波配 置。可选的，第一接入网设备向第一UE指示的载波配置，第一UE可能接受，也可能不接受。例如第三配置信息指示了至少一种载波配置，第一UE如果接受全部载波配置，则这全部载波配置就可配置给第二UE，例如至少一种载波配置为N种载波配置。或者，对于至少一种载波配置中的部分或全部载波配置，第一UE可能不接受，例如第一UE的能力无法支持工作在所述部分或全部载波配置所包括的载波上。如果第一UE不接受所述部分或全部载波配置，则第一UE可以向第一接入网设备发送用于指示配置失败的信息。第一接入网设备接收该信息后，可以重新向第一UE指示新的载波配置，直到第一UE接受为止，或者第一接入网设备也可以不再重新向第一UE指示新的载波配置，而是指示第一UE自行配置。As another optional implementation manner, the N types of carrier configurations may also be determined by the first access network device, and the first access network device is the serving access network device of the first UE. The first access network device may send third configuration information to the first UE, where the third configuration information may indicate N types of carrier configurations. After receiving the third configuration information, the first UE determines the N types of carrier configurations. place. Optionally, the first UE may or may not accept the carrier configuration indicated by the first access network device to the first UE. For example, the third configuration information indicates at least one carrier configuration. If the first UE accepts all carrier configurations, then all carrier configurations can be configured for the second UE. For example, at least one carrier configuration is N types of carrier configurations. Or, the first UE may not accept some or all of the carrier configurations in at least one carrier configuration, for example, the capabilities of the first UE cannot support working on the carriers included in the part or all of the carrier configurations. If the first UE does not accept the part or all of the carrier configurations, the first UE may send information indicating configuration failure to the first access network device. After receiving the information, the first access network device may re-indicate the new carrier configuration to the first UE until the first UE accepts it, or the first access network device may not re-indicate the new carrier configuration to the first UE configuration, but instructs the first UE to configure itself.
例如，第一UE处于RRC非激活(inactive)态或RRC空闲(idle)态时，第一UE可自行确定N种载波配置；或者，第一UE处于RRC连接(connected)态时，第一UE可自行确定N种载波配置，或者第一接入网设备可以确定N种载波配置。For example, when the first UE is in the RRC inactive (inactive) state or the RRC idle (idle) state, the first UE can determine N types of carrier configurations by itself; or, when the first UE is in the RRC connected (connected) state, the first UE The N types of carrier configurations may be determined by itself, or the first access network device may determine the N types of carrier configurations.
S202、第一UE向第二UE发送第一配置信息。相应的，第二UE接收来自第一UE的第一配置信息。第一配置信息可指示N种载波配置。可选的，第一配置信息可包括在RRC重配置侧行链路(RRC reconfiguration sidelink)消息中，或者也可以包括在第一UE与第二UE之间传输的其他消息中。S202. The first UE sends the first configuration information to the second UE. Correspondingly, the second UE receives the first configuration information from the first UE. The first configuration information may indicate N types of carrier configurations. Optionally, the first configuration information may be included in an RRC reconfiguration sidelink (RRC reconfiguration sidelink) message, or may also be included in other messages transmitted between the first UE and the second UE.
可选的，配置载波与激活(本申请的各个实施例中，“激活”，也可以描述为“使用”、“启用”或“应用”等；相应的，“去激活”，也可以描述为“不使用”、“停用”或“不应用”等)载波可以是同一种操作，即，向第二UE配置了一个载波，也就相当于为第二UE激活了该载波，那么第一配置信息也可以认为是激活信息，用于激活N种载波配置。或者，配置载波与激活载波是不同的操作，第一UE除了为第二UE配置载波外，还需要为第二UE激活该载波，这样第二UE才能应用该载波。例如，第一配置信息可包括用于配置N种载波配置的信息(例如下文将要介绍的N个信息)，以及还包括用于激活N种载波配置的信息，从而用于配置N种载波配置的信息相当于为第二UE配置了N种载波配置，而用于激活N种载波配置的信息相当于为第二UE激活了N种载波配置，或者说，激活了N种载波配置所包括的载波。又例如，第一配置信息可包括用于配置N种载波配置的信息(例如下文将要介绍的N个信息)，但不包括用于激活N种载波配置的信息，第一UE可以额外向第二UE发送用于激活N种载波配置中的至少一种载波配置的信息，例如，在第一UE接收来自第二UE的确认消息(关于确认消息将在后文介绍)后，可以向第二UE发送用于激活第二UE所接受的载波配置的信息。Optionally, carrier configuration and activation (in various embodiments of the present application, "activation" may also be described as "use", "enabling" or "application"; correspondingly, "deactivation" may also be described as "Not using", "deactivating" or "not applying", etc.) carrier may be the same operation, that is, configuring a carrier for the second UE is equivalent to activating the carrier for the second UE, then the first Configuration information can also be regarded as activation information, which is used to activate N types of carrier configurations. Alternatively, configuring a carrier is a different operation from activating a carrier. In addition to configuring a carrier for the second UE, the first UE also needs to activate the carrier for the second UE, so that the second UE can use the carrier. For example, the first configuration information may include information for configuring N types of carrier configurations (for example, N pieces of information to be introduced below), and further include information for activating N types of carrier configurations, so that the information used to configure N types of carrier configurations The information is equivalent to configuring N types of carrier configurations for the second UE, and the information for activating N types of carrier configurations is equivalent to activating N types of carrier configurations for the second UE, or activating the carriers included in the N types of carrier configurations. . For another example, the first configuration information may include information for configuring N types of carrier configurations (for example, N pieces of information to be introduced below), but does not include information for activating N types of carrier configurations, and the first UE may additionally send information to the second The UE sends information for activating at least one of the N carrier configurations, for example, after the first UE receives an acknowledgment message from the second UE (the acknowledgment message will be introduced later), it can send the information to the second UE Sending information for activating the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE.
本申请的各个实施例中，为UE激活一个载波，可以实现为，该UE开始使用该载波，例如该UE开始在该载波上与其他UE通信，包括在该载波上监听/接收等。相应的，为UE去激活一个载波，可以实现为，该UE停止使用该载波，例如该UE停止在该载波上通信，或者，该UE的所有通信行为都不使用该载波，或者，该UE在该载波上不再监听/接收等。例如，UE在某个载波上监听/接收，可以是指在该载波上监听/接收SCI。该SCI可以是第一级SCI，也可以是第二级SCI，也可以是第一级SCI和第二级SCI。In various embodiments of the present application, activating a carrier for the UE may be implemented as that the UE starts to use the carrier, for example, the UE starts to communicate with other UEs on the carrier, including monitoring/receiving on the carrier. Correspondingly, deactivating a carrier for the UE may be achieved by the UE stopping using the carrier, for example, the UE stops communicating on the carrier, or all communication activities of the UE do not use the carrier, or the UE is in No more listening/receiving etc. on this carrier. For example, the fact that the UE monitors/receives on a certain carrier may refer to monitoring/receiving the SCI on the carrier. The SCI may be a first-level SCI, or a second-level SCI, or a first-level SCI and a second-level SCI.
或者，为UE激活一个载波，也可以实现为，该UE开始在该载波上使用某种传输功能，该传输功能可以是该UE的全部或部分传输功能。相应的，为UE去激活一个载波，可以实现为，该UE停止在该载波上使用该传输功能，但是如果该传输功能是该UE的部分传输功能，则该UE还可以在该载波上使用该UE的其他传输功能。关于这些内容，将 在下个实施例中进行较为详细的介绍，此处不多赘述。Alternatively, activating a carrier for the UE may also be implemented as that the UE starts to use a certain transmission function on the carrier, and the transmission function may be all or part of the transmission function of the UE. Correspondingly, deactivating a carrier for the UE may be implemented as that the UE stops using the transmission function on the carrier, but if the transmission function is part of the transmission function of the UE, the UE may also use the transmission function on the carrier. Other transmission functions of the UE. Regarding these contents, the A more detailed introduction will be made in the next embodiment, and details will not be repeated here.
第一配置信息可包括N种载波配置所包括的全部载波的信息，由此指示N种载波配置。例如，第一配置信息包括N个信息，N个信息可指示N种载波配置，其中一个信息指示一种载波配置。例如N个信息中的一个信息为第一信息，第一信息可指示第一载波配置。第一载波配置包括M个载波，则第一信息可包括M个载波的信息。The first configuration information may include information of all carriers included in the N types of carrier configurations, thereby indicating the N types of carrier configurations. For example, the first configuration information includes N pieces of information, and the N pieces of information may indicate N types of carrier configurations, and one piece of information indicates one type of carrier configuration. For example, one of the N pieces of information is the first information, and the first information may indicate the first carrier configuration. The first carrier configuration includes M carriers, and the first information may include information about the M carriers.
例如，一个载波的信息可包括该载波的频率信息，那么第一信息可包括M个载波的频率信息。对于一个载波来说，可能包括多个资源块(resource block，RB)，该载波的频率可用该载波所包括的其中一个RB的频率来表示，例如用该RB的绝对频率表示。该RB例如为该载波所包括的参考RB，例如该参考RB为该载波所包括的RB中位于中间频域位置的RB，或为该载波所包括的RB中频率最低的RB，或为该载波所包括的RB中频率最高的RB等。For example, the information of a carrier may include frequency information of the carrier, then the first information may include frequency information of M carriers. A carrier may include multiple resource blocks (resource blocks, RBs), and the frequency of the carrier may be represented by the frequency of one of the RBs included in the carrier, for example, by the absolute frequency of the RB. The RB is, for example, the reference RB included in the carrier, for example, the reference RB is the RB located in the middle frequency domain among the RBs included in the carrier, or the RB with the lowest frequency among the RBs included in the carrier, or the RB of the carrier The RB with the highest frequency among the included RBs, etc.
可选的，一个载波的信息还可包括该载波的带宽信息。例如，一个载波的信息包括该载波的频率信息，可选包括该载波的带宽信息。那么，第一信息可包括M个载波的频率信息，可选的，还包括M个载波的带宽信息。Optionally, the information of a carrier may also include bandwidth information of the carrier. For example, the information of a carrier includes frequency information of the carrier, and may optionally include bandwidth information of the carrier. Then, the first information may include frequency information of the M carriers, and optionally, bandwidth information of the M carriers.
或者，一个载波的信息可以不包括该载波的频率信息，而是包括该载波的索引，那么第一信息可包括这M个载波的索引。相对于频率信息来说，载波的索引的信息量较小，占用的资源较少，有利于节省信令开销。例如，载波的索引与载波的标识(例如载波的参考RB的频率可视为该载波的标识，或者一个载波在频带中的序号可视为该载波的标识等)之间的对应关系，可以预配置在第一UE和第二UE中，第一UE和第二UE内预配置的对应关系可以完全相同，或者也可以部分相同。其中，将一个载波的索引与该载波的标识之间的对应关系认为是一个子关系，一个对应关系可包括一个或多个子关系。这里的完全相同是指，第一UE内预配置的对应关系所包括的子关系与第一UE内预配置的对应关系所包括的子关系完全相同；这里的部分相同是指，第一UE内预配置的对应关系所包括的子关系与第一UE内预配置的对应关系所包括的子关系部分相同，例如第一UE内预配置的对应关系包括子关系1～子关系3，第二UE内预配置的对应关系包括子关系2～子关系6。Or, the information of a carrier may not include the frequency information of the carrier, but include the index of the carrier, then the first information may include the indexes of the M carriers. Compared with the frequency information, the carrier index has a smaller amount of information and occupies less resources, which is beneficial to save signaling overhead. For example, the corresponding relationship between the index of the carrier and the identifier of the carrier (for example, the frequency of the reference RB of the carrier can be regarded as the identifier of the carrier, or the serial number of a carrier in the frequency band can be regarded as the identifier of the carrier, etc.), can be predicted The configuration is configured in the first UE and the second UE, and the pre-configured corresponding relationships in the first UE and the second UE may be completely the same, or may also be partially the same. Wherein, the corresponding relationship between the index of a carrier and the identifier of the carrier is regarded as a sub-relationship, and a corresponding relationship may include one or more sub-relationships. The exact sameness here means that the sub-relationships included in the pre-configured correspondence in the first UE are completely the same as the sub-relationships included in the pre-configured correspondence in the first UE; The sub-relations included in the pre-configured correspondence are partly the same as the sub-relations included in the pre-configured correspondence in the first UE. For example, the pre-configured correspondence in the first UE includes sub-relations 1 to 3, and the second UE The internally preconfigured corresponding relationship includes sub-relationship 2 to sub-relationship 6.
或者，载波的索引与载波的标识之间的对应关系，也可以包括在其他信息中。例如，第一UE可以从第一接入网设备接收第四信息，第四信息可包括载波的标识与载波的索引之间的对应关系，第一UE根据第四信息就能确定载波的索引。例如，第四信息可包括第一接入网设备所覆盖的UE使用的载波(可包括用于这些UE接收信息的载波，和/或用于这些UE发送信息的载波)的标识与这些载波的索引之间的对应关系。第二UE可以从第二接入网设备接收第五信息，第五信息可包括载波的标识与载波的索引之间的对应关系，第二UE根据第五信息就能确定载波的索引。例如，第五信息可包括第二接入网设备所覆盖的UE使用的载波(可包括用于这些UE接收信息的载波，和/或用于这些UE发送信息的载波)的标识与这些载波的索引之间的对应关系。其中，第四信息所包括的内容与第五信息所包括的内容可以完全相同，也可以部分相同，对此可参考上文的介绍。其中，第一接入网设备为第一UE的服务接入网设备，第二接入网设备为第二UE的服务接入网设备，第一接入网设备与第二接入网设备可以是同一个接入网设备，或者也可以是不同的接入网设备。Alternatively, the corresponding relationship between the index of the carrier and the identifier of the carrier may also be included in other information. For example, the first UE may receive fourth information from the first access network device, where the fourth information may include a correspondence between a carrier identifier and a carrier index, and the first UE may determine the carrier index according to the fourth information. For example, the fourth information may include identifiers of carriers used by UEs covered by the first access network device (may include carriers used for these UEs to receive information, and/or carriers used for these UEs to send information) and the IDs of these carriers. Correspondence between indexes. The second UE may receive fifth information from the second access network device, where the fifth information may include a correspondence between carrier identifiers and carrier indexes, and the second UE may determine the carrier indexes according to the fifth information. For example, the fifth information may include identifiers of carriers used by UEs covered by the second access network device (may include carriers used for these UEs to receive information, and/or carriers used for these UEs to send information) and the IDs of these carriers. Correspondence between indexes. Wherein, the content included in the fourth information and the content included in the fifth information may be completely the same, or may be partly the same, for which reference may be made to the introduction above. Wherein, the first access network device is the serving access network device of the first UE, the second access network device is the serving access network device of the second UE, and the first access network device and the second access network device may It is the same access network device, or may be different access network devices.
可选的，一个载波的信息还可包括该载波的带宽信息。例如，一个载波的信息包括该载波的索引，可选包括该载波的带宽信息。那么，第一信息可包括M个载波的索引，可选 的，还包括M个载波的带宽信息。Optionally, the information of a carrier may also include bandwidth information of the carrier. For example, the information of a carrier includes the index of the carrier, and optionally includes the bandwidth information of the carrier. Then, the first information may include indexes of M carriers, optionally , also includes bandwidth information of the M carriers.
第一UE所指示的N种载波配置，可能用于第二UE接收来自第一UE的信息，和/或用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息。为了使得第一UE所指示的载波配置更为符合第二UE的能力和实际使用情况，可选的，本申请实施例还可包括S203：第二UE向第一UE发送能力信息，相应的，第一UE接收来自第二UE的能力信息。该能力信息例如包括在UE能力信息侧行(UE capability information sidelink)消息中，或包括在其他消息中。例如，S203发生在S201之前。该能力信息为第二UE的能力信息，该能力信息可以是第二UE首次向第一UE发送的能力信息，或者也可以是在第二UE的能力发生改变时，第二UE向第一UE发送的更新的能力信息。例如，第二UE在与第一UE建立PC5单播连接后，可将第二UE当前的能力信息发送给第一UE。接下来，第二UE还可能与除第一UE外的其他UE进行SL通信，例如PC5单播通信、PC5组播通信或PC5广播通信等，这些通信过程可能使得第二UE占用或释放某些频带，或者使得第二UE对于多载波的支持能力发生改变，这可能导致第二UE的能力发生改变。如果第二UE的能力发生改变，则第二UE可再将更新的能力信息发送给第一UE，使得第一UE能够根据第二UE的最新能力信息来确定N种载波配置。The N carrier configurations indicated by the first UE may be used by the second UE to receive information from the first UE, and/or used by the second UE to send information to the first UE. In order to make the carrier configuration indicated by the first UE more in line with the capabilities and actual usage of the second UE, optionally, this embodiment of the present application may further include S203: the second UE sends capability information to the first UE, and accordingly, The first UE receives capability information from the second UE. The capability information is, for example, included in a UE capability information sidelink (UE capability information sidelink) message, or included in other messages. For example, S203 occurs before S201. The capability information is the capability information of the second UE, and the capability information may be the capability information sent by the second UE to the first UE for the first time, or it may be the capability information sent by the second UE to the first UE when the capability of the second UE changes. The updated capability information sent. For example, after establishing a PC5 unicast connection with the first UE, the second UE may send current capability information of the second UE to the first UE. Next, the second UE may also perform SL communication with other UEs except the first UE, such as PC5 unicast communication, PC5 multicast communication or PC5 broadcast communication, etc. These communication processes may cause the second UE to occupy or release some frequency band, or change the capability of the second UE to support multiple carriers, which may cause the capability of the second UE to change. If the capability of the second UE changes, the second UE may send updated capability information to the first UE, so that the first UE can determine N types of carrier configurations according to the latest capability information of the second UE.
第一UE接收该能力信息后，在确定N种载波配置时，可将第二UE的能力信息作为参考因素。或者，如果N种载波配置由第一接入网设备确定，则第一UE在接收该能力信息后，可将该能力信息发送给第一接入网设备，以供第一接入网设备在确定N种载波配置时刻将该能力信息作为参考因素。该能力信息例如包括第二UE的接收能力信息，和/或包括第二UE的发送能力信息；或者，第二UE的发送能力信息与接收能力信息相同，则该能力信息包括第二UE的发送能力信息或接收能力信息即可。After receiving the capability information, the first UE may use the capability information of the second UE as a reference factor when determining N types of carrier configurations. Alternatively, if the N types of carrier configurations are determined by the first access network device, after receiving the capability information, the first UE may send the capability information to the first access network device for the first access network device to The capability information is used as a reference factor at the time of determining N types of carrier configurations. The capability information includes, for example, the receiving capability information of the second UE, and/or includes the transmitting capability information of the second UE; or, the transmitting capability information of the second UE is the same as the receiving capability information, then the capability information includes the transmitting Capability information or receiving capability information is sufficient.
该能力信息可包括如下一项或多项：第二UE支持的频带信息，第二UE支持的频带组合信息，或，第二UE对于多载波的支持能力信息。其中，一个频带组合可包括至少两个频带。另外，第二UE对于多载波的支持能力信息，是以第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息为例。第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息可包括第二UE支持的侧行载波聚合带宽等级，和/或包括第二UE支持的带内非连续载波聚合频率分离等级。第二UE支持的侧行载波聚合带宽等级，可包括第二UE支持的参与侧行载波聚合的连续分量载波的数量(number of contiguous component carrier)，和/或第二UE支持的侧行聚合信道带宽(aggregated channel bandwidth)。第二UE支持的带内非连续载波聚合频率分离等级，可指示第二UE所支持的最大频率间隔，即，在参与载波聚合的载波中，相邻载波之间的最大频率间隔。The capability information may include one or more of the following: information about frequency bands supported by the second UE, information about frequency band combinations supported by the second UE, or information about the ability of the second UE to support multiple carriers. Wherein, one frequency band combination may include at least two frequency bands. In addition, the support capability information of the second UE for multiple carriers is taken as an example of the support capability information of the second UE for sidelink multiple carriers. The second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers may include sidelink carrier aggregation bandwidth levels supported by the second UE, and/or include frequency separation levels for in-band non-continuous carrier aggregation supported by the second UE. The sidelink carrier aggregation bandwidth level supported by the second UE may include the number of contiguous component carriers supported by the second UE participating in sidelink carrier aggregation, and/or the sidelink aggregation channel supported by the second UE Bandwidth (aggregated channel bandwidth). The in-band discontinuous carrier aggregation frequency separation level supported by the second UE may indicate the maximum frequency separation supported by the second UE, that is, the maximum frequency separation between adjacent carriers among carriers participating in carrier aggregation.
可选的，第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息，与第二UE支持的频带信息有关，则第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息，可以包括第二UE在所支持的一个或多个频带下对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息。例如，在第二UE支持的不同的频带下，第二UE分别具有对于侧行多载波的支持能力，不同的频带所对应的侧行多载波的支持能力相同或不同。例如第二UE支持频带1和频带2，在频带1下，第二UE支持的连续分量载波的数量为2，第二UE支持的侧行聚合信道带宽为A1，第二UE支持的最大频率间隔为B1。在频带2下，第二UE支持的连续分量载波的数量为3，第二UE支持的侧行聚合信道带宽为A2，第二UE支持的最大频率间隔为B2。其中，A1与A2可能相等，也可能不相等；B1与B2可能相等，也可能不相等。 Optionally, the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers is related to the frequency band information supported by the second UE, then the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers may include Support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers in one or more frequency bands. For example, under different frequency bands supported by the second UE, the second UEs respectively have support capabilities for sidelink multi-carriers, and the sidelink multi-carrier support capabilities corresponding to different frequency bands are the same or different. For example, the second UE supports frequency band 1 and frequency band 2. In frequency band 1, the number of continuous component carriers supported by the second UE is 2, the sidelink aggregation channel bandwidth supported by the second UE is A 1 , and the maximum frequency supported by the second UE is The interval is B 1 . In frequency band 2, the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE is 3, the bandwidth of the sidelink aggregation channel supported by the second UE is A 2 , and the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE is B 2 . Among them, A 1 and A 2 may or may not be equal; B 1 and B 2 may or may not be equal.
或者，第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息，与第二UE支持的频带组合信息有关，则第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息，可以包括第二UE在所支持的一个或多个频带组合下对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息。例如，在第二UE支持的不同的频带组合下，第二UE分别具有对于侧行多载波的支持能力，不同的频带组合所对应的侧行多载波的支持能力相同或不同。例如第二UE支持频带组合1和频带组合2，其中频带组合1包括频带1和频带2，频带组合2包括频带1和频带3。在频带组合1下，第二UE支持的连续分量载波的数量为5，第二UE支持的侧行聚合信道带宽为A3，第二UE支持的最大频率间隔为B3。在频带组合2下，第二UE支持的连续分量载波的数量为3，第二UE支持的侧行聚合信道带宽为A4，第二UE支持的最大频率间隔为B4。其中，A3与A4可能相等，也可能不相等；B3与B4可能相等，也可能不相等。或者，如果第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息与第二UE支持的频带组合信息有关，则第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息，也可以包括第二UE在所支持的一个或多个频带组合所包括的频带下对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息，不多赘述。Alternatively, the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers is related to the frequency band combination information supported by the second UE, then the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers may include one Or support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers under a combination of multiple frequency bands. For example, under different frequency band combinations supported by the second UE, the second UEs respectively have support capabilities for sidelink multi-carriers, and the sidelink multi-carrier support capabilities corresponding to different frequency band combinations are the same or different. For example, the second UE supports frequency band combination 1 and frequency band combination 2, wherein frequency band combination 1 includes frequency band 1 and frequency band 2, and frequency band combination 2 includes frequency band 1 and frequency band 3. In frequency band combination 1, the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE is 5, the bandwidth of the sidelink aggregation channel supported by the second UE is A 3 , and the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE is B 3 . In the frequency band combination 2, the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE is 3, the sidelink aggregation channel bandwidth supported by the second UE is A 4 , and the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE is B 4 . Among them, A 3 and A 4 may or may not be equal; B 3 and B 4 may or may not be equal. Alternatively, if the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers is related to the frequency band combination information supported by the second UE, then the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers may also include Information about the support capability of sidelink multi-carriers under the frequency bands included in one or more frequency band combinations will not be repeated here.
或者，第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息，与第二UE支持的频带或频带组合无关，例如无论对于哪个频带或哪个频带组合，第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息都是一样的，那么该能力信息包括第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息即可。例如，第二UE对于侧行多载波的支持能力信息包括，第二UE支持的连续分量载波的数量为4，第二UE支持的侧行聚合信道带宽为A5，第二UE支持的最大频率间隔为B5。Alternatively, the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers has nothing to do with the frequency band or frequency band combination supported by the second UE. If they are the same, then the capability information only needs to include the capability information of the second UE supporting the sidelink multi-carrier. For example, the second UE's support capability information for sidelink multi-carriers includes, the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE is 4, the sidelink aggregation channel bandwidth supported by the second UE is A 5 , and the maximum frequency supported by the second UE is The interval is B 5 .
第二UE可主动向第一UE发送该能力信息，或者，第二UE也可以在第一UE的请求下再向第一UE发送该能力信息。可选的，本申请实施例还包括S204：第一UE向第二UE发送能力询问信息，相应的，第二UE接收来自第一UE的能力询问信息，该能力询问信息可请求第二UE提供能力信息。该能力询问信息例如包括在UE能力询问侧行(UE capability enquiry sidelink)消息中，或包括在其他消息中。例如S204发生在S203之前。第二UE接收该能力询问信息后，可以向第一UE发送该能力信息。The second UE may actively send the capability information to the first UE, or the second UE may send the capability information to the first UE at the request of the first UE. Optionally, this embodiment of the present application further includes S204: the first UE sends capability query information to the second UE, and accordingly, the second UE receives capability query information from the first UE, and the capability query information may request the second UE to provide capability information. The capability inquiry information is, for example, included in a UE capability inquiry sidelink (UE capability enquiry sidelink) message, or included in other messages. For example, S204 occurs before S203. After receiving the capability inquiry information, the second UE may send the capability information to the first UE.
可选的，该能力询问信息还包括如下信息中的一项或多项：带宽信息(例如称为第一带宽信息)，载波数量信息，或，分离等级信息。这一项或多项信息可以包括在一个信息中，例如该信息称为侧链多载波UE能力信息；或者，这一项或多项信息也可以是不同的信息，例如带宽信息为信息A，载波数量信息为信息B，分离等级信息为信息C。Optionally, the capability query information further includes one or more of the following information: bandwidth information (for example, referred to as first bandwidth information), carrier number information, or separation level information. The one or more items of information may be included in one piece of information, for example, the information is called side chain multi-carrier UE capability information; or, the one or more pieces of information may also be different information, for example, the bandwidth information is information A, Information on the number of carriers is information B, and separation level information is information C.
如果由第一UE确定N种载波配置，则第一UE可确定该能力询问信息包括的如上一项或多项信息；或者，如果由第一接入网设备确定N种载波配置，则该能力询问信息可由第一接入网设备发送给第一UE，再由第一UE发送给第二UE，那么如上的一项或多项信息可由第一接入网设备确定；或者，如果由第一接入网设备确定N种载波配置，该能力询问信息也可由第一UE发送给第二UE，第一UE再将来自第二UE的能力信息发送给第一接入网设备即可，则如上的一项或多项信息可由第一UE确定。If N types of carrier configurations are determined by the first UE, the first UE may determine one or more of the above information included in the capability inquiry information; or, if N types of carrier configurations are determined by the first access network device, the capability The query information may be sent by the first access network device to the first UE, and then sent by the first UE to the second UE, then one or more items of information above may be determined by the first access network device; or, if the first The access network device determines N types of carrier configurations, and the capability query information can also be sent by the first UE to the second UE, and the first UE can then send the capability information from the second UE to the first access network device, as above One or more pieces of information of may be determined by the first UE.
其中，第一带宽信息可指示第二UE提供能够支持第一带宽信息的频带或频带组合。例如，第一带宽信息可指示第一带宽，这相当于指示第二UE，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带中的每个频带应该能够支持第一带宽；或，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带组合所包括的每个频带应该能够支持第一带宽；或，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带组合中的每个频带组合应该能够支持第一带宽。其中，一个频带支持第一带宽，可以实现为，该频带的最大带宽大于或等于第一带宽。一个频带组合支持第一带宽， 可以实现为，该频带组合所包括的全部频带的总的最大带宽大于或等于第一带宽。另外，第一带宽信息可以是第一带宽的频率信息，或者是第一带宽的索引，或者是能够用于确定第一带宽的其他信息。Wherein, the first bandwidth information may instruct the second UE to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the first bandwidth information. For example, the first bandwidth information may indicate the first bandwidth, which is equivalent to indicating to the second UE that each frequency band in the frequency bands indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first bandwidth; Each frequency band included in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent should be able to support the first bandwidth; or, each frequency band combination in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first bandwidth. Where one frequency band supports the first bandwidth, it may be realized that the maximum bandwidth of the frequency band is greater than or equal to the first bandwidth. a band combination supports the first bandwidth, It may be realized that the total maximum bandwidth of all frequency bands included in the frequency band combination is greater than or equal to the first bandwidth. In addition, the first bandwidth information may be frequency information of the first bandwidth, or an index of the first bandwidth, or other information that can be used to determine the first bandwidth.
载波数量信息可指示第二UE提供能够支持该载波数量信息的频带或频带组合。例如，该载波数量信息指示第一数量，这相当于指示第二UE，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带中的每个频带应该能够支持第一数量；或，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带组合所包括的每个频带应该能够支持第一数量；或，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带组合中的每个频带组合应该能够支持第一数量。其中，一个频带支持第一数量，可以实现为，第二UE在该频带下支持的连续分量载波的数量小于或等于第一数量。一个频带组合支持第一数量，可以实现为，第二UE在该频带组合包括的全部载波下支持的总的连续分量载波的数量小于或等于第一数量。The information on the number of carriers may instruct the second UE to provide a frequency band or combination of frequency bands capable of supporting the information on the number of carriers. For example, the carrier number information indicates the first number, which is equivalent to indicating the second UE, and each frequency band in the frequency bands indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first number; or, the second UE sends Each frequency band included in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information of the second UE shall be able to support the first quantity; or, each frequency band combination in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE shall be able to support the first quantity. Where one frequency band supports the first number, it may be realized that the number of consecutive component carriers supported by the second UE under the frequency band is less than or equal to the first number. Supporting the first number by a frequency band combination may be implemented as that the total number of continuous component carriers supported by the second UE under all carriers included in the frequency band combination is less than or equal to the first number.
分离等级信息可指示第二UE提供能够支持该分离等级信息的频带或频带组合。例如，该分离等级信息指示第一频率间隔，这相当于指示第二UE，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带中的每个频带应该能够支持第一频率间隔；或，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带组合所包括的每个频带应该能够支持第一频率间隔；或，第二UE所发送的能力信息所指示的频带组合中的每个频带组合应该能够支持第一频率间隔。其中，一个频带支持第一频率间隔，可以实现为，第二UE在该频带下支持的最大频率间隔小于或等于第一频率间隔。一个频带组合支持第一数量，可以实现为，第二UE在该频带组合包括的全部频带下支持的最大频率间隔小于或等于第一频率间隔。例如，一个频带组合包括多个频带，第二UE在其中每个频带可以有所支持的最大频率间隔，可将这些最大频率间隔中取值最大或最小的频率间隔认为是第二UE在该频带组合下支持的最大频率间隔。The separation level information may instruct the second UE to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination capable of supporting the separation level information. For example, the separation level information indicates the first frequency interval, which is equivalent to indicating the second UE, and each frequency band in the frequency bands indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first frequency interval; or, the second UE Each frequency band included in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent should be able to support the first frequency interval; or, each frequency band combination in the frequency band combination indicated by the capability information sent by the second UE should be able to support the first frequency interval. frequency interval. Where one frequency band supports the first frequency interval, it may be realized that the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE in the frequency band is smaller than or equal to the first frequency interval. A frequency band combination supporting the first number may be realized in that the maximum frequency interval supported by the second UE in all frequency bands included in the frequency band combination is less than or equal to the first frequency interval. For example, a frequency band combination includes multiple frequency bands, and the second UE can support the maximum frequency interval in each frequency band, and the frequency interval with the largest or smallest value among these maximum frequency intervals can be considered as the second UE in the frequency band. The maximum frequency interval supported under the combination.
通过能力询问信息所包括的如上信息，可以令第二UE进行相应的筛选，使得第二UE所发送的能力信息能够符合第一UE的要求。Through the above information included in the capability inquiry information, the second UE can be made to perform corresponding screening, so that the capability information sent by the second UE can meet the requirements of the first UE.
前文介绍了，为了使得第一UE所指示的载波配置更为符合第二UE的能力和实际使用情况，第二UE可以向第一UE发送能力信息。或者，第二UE也可以不向第一UE发送能力信息，而是向第一UE发送辅助信息，则S203可以替换为：第二UE向第一UE发送辅助信息，相应的，第一UE接收来自第二UE的辅助信息。或者，第二UE可以向第一UE发送能力信息和辅助信息，则S203可以替换为：第二UE向第一UE发送能力信息和辅助信息，相应的，第一UE接收来自第二UE的能力信息和辅助信息。综上，图2中的S203为，第二UE向第一UE发送能力信息和/或辅助信息。该辅助信息也可以用于辅助第一UE(或第一接入网设备)确定N种载波配置。例如该辅助信息也可称为侧链多载波辅助信息等。对于辅助信息，可以是第二UE主动向第一UE发送的，无需第一UE的请求；或者，也可以是第一UE请求的，例如第一UE通过S204可请求能力信息和/或辅助信息。As mentioned above, in order to make the carrier configuration indicated by the first UE more consistent with the capability and actual usage of the second UE, the second UE may send capability information to the first UE. Alternatively, the second UE may not send capability information to the first UE, but may send auxiliary information to the first UE, then S203 may be replaced by: the second UE sends auxiliary information to the first UE, and correspondingly, the first UE receives Assistance information from the second UE. Alternatively, the second UE may send the capability information and auxiliary information to the first UE, then S203 may be replaced by: the second UE sends the capability information and auxiliary information to the first UE, and correspondingly, the first UE receives the capability information from the second UE Information and Supporting Information. To sum up, S203 in FIG. 2 is that the second UE sends capability information and/or auxiliary information to the first UE. The auxiliary information may also be used to assist the first UE (or the first access network device) in determining N types of carrier configurations. For example, the auxiliary information may also be called side chain multi-carrier auxiliary information and the like. As for the auxiliary information, it may be actively sent by the second UE to the first UE without a request from the first UE; or it may be requested by the first UE, for example, the first UE may request capability information and/or auxiliary information through S204 .
该辅助信息可指示K种载波配置，K为正整数。K种载波配置为第二UE期望的载波配置，或为第二UE想要的载波配置，或为第二UE倾向的载波配置，或为第二UE认为可优先的载波配置。在后文中，以K种载波配置是第二UE期望的载波配置为例。K种载波配置可包括用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息的载波。例如，K种载波配置中的一种载波配置可称为第二载波配置，第二载波配置可包括P个载波，这P个载波为第二UE期望配置的载波，或为第二UE想要配置的载波，或为第二UE倾向于配置的载波，或为第二UE认为可优先配置的载波。在后 文中，以P个载波是第二UE期望配置的载波为例。这P个载波可包括用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息的载波(或者描述为，用于第二UE接收来自第一UE的信息的载波)，和/或，包括用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息的载波(或者描述为，用于第一UE接收来自第二UE的信息的载波)。其中，P为正整数。The auxiliary information may indicate K types of carrier configurations, where K is a positive integer. The K types of carrier configurations are carrier configurations desired by the second UE, or desired by the second UE, or preferred by the second UE, or preferred by the second UE. In the following, it is assumed that K carrier configurations are desired carrier configurations of the second UE as an example. The K carrier configurations may include carriers used for the first UE to send information to the second UE, and/or include carriers used for the second UE to send information to the first UE. For example, one of the K carrier configurations may be referred to as a second carrier configuration, and the second carrier configuration may include P carriers, and the P carriers are the carriers desired to be configured by the second UE, or the carriers desired by the second UE. The configured carrier is either the carrier that the second UE tends to configure, or the carrier that the second UE considers to be preferentially configured. is behind Herein, it is taken as an example that the P carriers are the carriers expected to be configured by the second UE. These P carriers may include a carrier used for the first UE to send information to the second UE (or described as, a carrier used for the second UE to receive information from the first UE), and/or include a carrier used for the second UE A carrier for sending information to the first UE (or described as, a carrier for the first UE to receive information from the second UE). Wherein, P is a positive integer.
如果K大于1，则K种载波配置除了包括第二载波配置外还包括其他载波配置，例如K种载波配置中的每种载波配置都可以包括第二UE期望载波配置的载波，这些载波可用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息，和/或用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息。K种载波配置中的不同载波配置所包括的载波可以不同，对此可参考S201中对于N种载波配置的介绍。If K is greater than 1, the K carrier configurations include other carrier configurations in addition to the second carrier configuration. For example, each carrier configuration in the K carrier configurations may include carriers of the second UE desired carrier configuration. These carriers can be used for The first UE sends information to the second UE, and/or the second UE sends information to the first UE. Different carrier configurations among the K carrier configurations may include different carriers, for which reference may be made to the introduction of N carrier configurations in S201.
第一UE接收该辅助信息后，在确定N种载波配置时，可将该辅助信息作为参考因素(或者，如果第一UE从第二UE接收了辅助信息和能力信息，则在确定N种载波配置时，可将该能力信息和/或该辅助信息作为参考因素)。或者，如果N种载波配置由第一接入网设备确定，则第一UE在接收该辅助信息后，可将该辅助信息发送给第一接入网设备，以供第一接入网设备在确定N种载波配置时刻将该辅助信息作为参考因素(或者，如果第一接入网设备从第一UE接收了辅助信息和能力信息，则在确定N种载波配置时，可将该能力信息和/或该辅助信息作为参考因素)。例如，N种载波配置与K种载波配置相同，这是指，N种载波配置与K种载波配置一一相同；或者，N种载波配置中有部分载波配置与K种载波配置相同，剩余部分载波配置与K种载波配置不同，例如，N种载波配置中的N1种载波配置与K种载波配置中的N1种载波配置相同，N种载波配置还包括N2种载波配置，与K种载波配置中的各种载波配置均不同；或者，N种载波配置与K种载波配置不同，这是指，N种载波配置中的任一种载波配置都与K种载波配置不同。可选的，N种载波配置所包括的载波，是K种载波配置所包括的载波的子集，这使得为第二UE所配置的载波尽量是第二UE期望的载波。例如，N种载波配置包括载波1～载波4，K种载波配置包括载波1～载波5。After the first UE receives the auxiliary information, it can use the auxiliary information as a reference factor when determining the N types of carrier configurations (or, if the first UE receives the auxiliary information and capability information from the second UE, it can determine the N types of carrier configurations During configuration, the capability information and/or the auxiliary information may be used as reference factors). Alternatively, if the N types of carrier configurations are determined by the first access network device, after receiving the auxiliary information, the first UE may send the auxiliary information to the first access network device for the first access network device to The auxiliary information is used as a reference factor when determining the N types of carrier configurations (or, if the first access network device receives the auxiliary information and capability information from the first UE, when determining the N types of carrier configurations, the capability information and /or this auxiliary information as a reference factor). For example, the N types of carrier configurations are the same as the K types of carrier configurations, which means that the N types of carrier configurations are the same as the K types of carrier configurations; or, some of the N types of carrier configurations are the same as the K types of carrier configurations, and the rest The carrier configuration is different from the K carrier configurations. For example, the N1 carrier configurations in the N carrier configurations are the same as the N1 carrier configurations in the K carrier configurations, and the N carrier configurations also include N2 carrier configurations, which are different from the K carrier configurations. All carrier configurations in the carrier configurations are different; or, the N carrier configurations are different from the K carrier configurations, which means that any carrier configuration in the N carrier configurations is different from the K carrier configurations. Optionally, the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are a subset of the carriers included in the K carrier configurations, so that the carriers configured for the second UE are as far as possible the carriers expected by the second UE. For example, N carrier configurations include carrier 1 to carrier 4, and K carrier configurations include carrier 1 to carrier 5.
作为一种可选的实施方式，K种载波配置所包括的载波中，可以包括第二UE正在使用的载波。例如K种载波配置包括第三载波，第三载波是第二UE正在使用的载波。例如，第二UE正在与除了第一UE外的其他一个或多个UE通信，通信方式例如包括PC5单播通信、PC5组播通信或PC5广播通信中的一种或多种。在该通信过程中第二UE可能使用一个或多个载波，则第二UE可将这一个或多个载波中的部分或全部包括在K种载波配置中。如果第一UE根据该辅助信息为第二UE所配置的载波中包括第二UE正在使用的载波，则因为第二UE正在使用这些载波，因此第二UE已在这些载波上监听/接收，如果第一UE配置第二UE继续使用这些载波，则第二UE可以无需再在新的载波上监听/接收，而是继续在已使用的载波上监听/接收即可，能够节省第二UE的功耗。As an optional implementation manner, the carriers included in the K carrier configurations may include the carrier being used by the second UE. For example, the K carrier configurations include a third carrier, and the third carrier is a carrier being used by the second UE. For example, the second UE is communicating with one or more other UEs except the first UE, and the communication manner includes, for example, one or more of PC5 unicast communication, PC5 multicast communication, or PC5 broadcast communication. During the communication process, the second UE may use one or more carriers, and the second UE may include part or all of the one or more carriers in the K carrier configurations. If the carriers configured by the first UE for the second UE according to the assistance information include the carriers being used by the second UE, because the second UE is using these carriers, the second UE has already monitored/received on these carriers, if The first UE configures the second UE to continue to use these carriers, then the second UE does not need to monitor/receive on the new carrier, but continues to monitor/receive on the used carrier, which can save the work of the second UE consumption.
可选的，考虑到拥塞问题，第二UE可以监测载波的拥塞程度，例如第二UE通过信道繁忙比率(channel busy ratio，CBR)来确定载波的繁忙程度。例如，如果第二UE正在使用的某个载波的CBR较高，表明该载波较为繁忙，则第二UE可不将该载波添加到K种载波配置中；如果第二UE正在使用的某个载波的CBR较低，表明该载波较为空闲，则第二UE可将该载波添加到K种载波配置中的一种或多种载波配置中。通过这种方式，既能够节省第二UE的功耗，也能够考虑到载波的拥塞程度，以减小碰撞。Optionally, considering the congestion problem, the second UE may monitor the congestion level of the carrier, for example, the second UE determines the busyness of the carrier through a channel busy ratio (channel busy ratio, CBR). For example, if the CBR of a certain carrier being used by the second UE is high, indicating that the carrier is relatively busy, the second UE may not add the carrier to the K carrier configurations; if the CBR of a certain carrier being used by the second UE is A lower CBR indicates that the carrier is relatively idle, and the second UE may add the carrier to one or more carrier configurations in the K carrier configurations. In this way, the power consumption of the second UE can be saved, and the congestion degree of the carrier can also be considered to reduce collisions.
该辅助信息指示K种载波配置，例如一种指示方式为，该辅助信息包括K种载波配置所包括的全部载波的信息。例如，该辅助信息可包括K个信息，K个信息可指示K种载波 配置，其中一个信息指示一种载波配置。例如K个信息中的一个信息为第二信息，第二信息可指示第二载波配置。第二载波配置包括P个载波，则第二信息可包括P个载波的信息。例如，一个载波的信息可包括该载波的频率信息或该载波的索引。可选的，该载波的信息还可包括该载波的带宽信息。关于载波的信息所包括的内容，可参考S202的介绍。The auxiliary information indicates K types of carrier configurations. For example, an indication manner is that the auxiliary information includes information of all carriers included in the K types of carrier configurations. For example, the auxiliary information may include K pieces of information, and the K pieces of information may indicate K types of carriers configuration, one of which indicates a carrier configuration. For example, one of the K pieces of information is the second information, and the second information may indicate the second carrier configuration. If the second carrier configuration includes P carriers, the second information may include information on the P carriers. For example, information of a carrier may include frequency information of the carrier or an index of the carrier. Optionally, the carrier information may also include bandwidth information of the carrier. For content included in the carrier information, refer to the introduction of S202.
如果辅助信息所包括的一个载波的信息包括该载波的带宽信息，可选的，该带宽信息例如为该载波的最大带宽。例如，P个载波中的一个载波为第一载波，第二信息包括第一载波的带宽信息，该带宽信息所指示的带宽可称为第二带宽。第二带宽可以是第一载波的最大带宽，对此可以理解为，如果第一UE(或第一接入网设备)要为第二UE配置第一载波，即，如果N种载波配置中的任意一种或多种载波配置包括第一载波，那么第一UE(或第一接入网设备)所配置的第一载波的带宽，可以小于或等于第二带宽。If the information about a carrier included in the auxiliary information includes bandwidth information of the carrier, optionally, the bandwidth information is, for example, the maximum bandwidth of the carrier. For example, one of the P carriers is the first carrier, the second information includes bandwidth information of the first carrier, and the bandwidth indicated by the bandwidth information may be called the second bandwidth. The second bandwidth may be the maximum bandwidth of the first carrier, which can be understood as, if the first UE (or the first access network device) is to configure the first carrier for the second UE, that is, if the N carrier configurations Any one or more carrier configurations include the first carrier, then the bandwidth of the first carrier configured by the first UE (or the first access network device) may be less than or equal to the second bandwidth.
S205、第二UE向第一UE发送确认信息。相应的，第一UE从第二UE接收该确认信息。如果第二UE接受第一配置信息，则第二UE可以向第一UE发送确认信息，以指示第二UE接受第一配置信息，或指示第二UE接受N种载波配置。该确认信息也可以称为成功信息或接受信息等，本文以确认信息为例。S205. The second UE sends confirmation information to the first UE. Correspondingly, the first UE receives the confirmation information from the second UE. If the second UE accepts the first configuration information, the second UE may send confirmation information to the first UE, to instruct the second UE to accept the first configuration information, or to instruct the second UE to accept N kinds of carrier configurations. The confirmation information may also be referred to as success information or acceptance information, and the confirmation information is used as an example in this document.
其中，如果N＝1，则第一配置信息指示了一种载波配置(例如第一载波配置)，则如果第二UE完全接受第一载波配置，则第二UE可以向第一UE发送确认信息。其中，第二UE完全接受第一载波配置，是指第二UE接受第一载波配置所配置的全部载波。可选的，第二UE可根据多种因素确定是否接受一个载波。例如第二UE可根据第二UE的能力、第二UE对于载波数量的支持情况、或载波拥塞程度中的一种或多种因素，确定第二UE是否支持一个载波。Wherein, if N=1, the first configuration information indicates a kind of carrier configuration (for example, the first carrier configuration), and if the second UE fully accepts the first carrier configuration, the second UE may send confirmation information to the first UE . Wherein, the second UE completely accepts the first carrier configuration, which means that the second UE accepts all carriers configured by the first carrier configuration. Optionally, the second UE may determine whether to accept a carrier according to various factors. For example, the second UE may determine whether the second UE supports a carrier according to one or more factors in the capability of the second UE, the number of carriers supported by the second UE, or the degree of carrier congestion.
如果N>1，则第一配置信息指示了多种载波配置。则如果第二UE完全接受N种载波配置中的一种载波配置，则第二UE可以向第一UE发送确认信息。第二UE完全接受一种载波配置，是指第二UE对于该载波配置所配置的全部载波均接受。可选的，如果第二UE完全接受N种载波配置中的多种载波配置，则第二UE可以从这多种载波配置中选择一种载波配置。If N>1, the first configuration information indicates multiple carrier configurations. Then, if the second UE fully accepts one carrier configuration among the N carrier configurations, the second UE may send confirmation information to the first UE. The second UE completely accepts a carrier configuration, which means that the second UE accepts all carriers configured by the carrier configuration. Optionally, if the second UE fully accepts multiple carrier configurations in the N carrier configurations, the second UE may select one carrier configuration from the multiple carrier configurations.
由于N>1，而第二UE是接受了其中一种载波配置，则可选的，该确认信息可指示第二UE所接受的载波配置，从而第一UE与第二UE的后续通信过程可使用这种载波配置。Since N>1, and the second UE has accepted one of the carrier configurations, optionally, the confirmation information may indicate the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE, so that the subsequent communication process between the first UE and the second UE can be Use this carrier configuration.
第一UE接收该确认信息后，可以在与第二UE的通信过程中使用第二UE所接受的载波配置。而第二UE在发送该确认信息后，也可以在与第一UE的通信过程中使用第二UE所接受的载波配置。可选的，如果N种载波配置是第一接入网设备确定的，则第一UE还可将该确认信息发送给第一接入网设备，使得第一接入网设备明确载波配置过程结束。After receiving the confirmation information, the first UE may use the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE during communication with the second UE. After the second UE sends the confirmation information, it may also use the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE during communication with the first UE. Optionally, if the N types of carrier configurations are determined by the first access network device, the first UE may also send the confirmation information to the first access network device, so that the first access network device knows that the carrier configuration process is over .
可选的，该确认信息例如包括在RRC重配置完成侧行(RRC reconfiguration complete sidelink)消息中，或者也可以包括在其他消息中。Optionally, the confirmation information is, for example, included in an RRC reconfiguration complete sidelink (RRC reconfiguration complete sidelink) message, or may also be included in other messages.
S206、第二UE向第一UE发送拒绝信息。相应的，第一UE从第二UE接收该拒绝信息。如果第二UE不接受第一配置信息，则第二UE可以向第一UE发送拒绝信息，以指示第二UE不接受第一配置信息，或指示第二UE不接受N种载波配置。该拒绝信息也可以称为失败信息等，本文以拒绝信息为例。其中，S205和S206是两种可选的方案，第二UE可根据对于第一配置信息的接受情况(或者，根据对N种载波配置的接受情况)确定执行S205或S206。S206. The second UE sends rejection information to the first UE. Correspondingly, the first UE receives the rejection information from the second UE. If the second UE does not accept the first configuration information, the second UE may send rejection information to the first UE, to instruct the second UE not to accept the first configuration information, or to instruct the second UE not to accept N kinds of carrier configurations. The rejection information may also be called failure information, etc., and the rejection information is used as an example in this document. Wherein, S205 and S206 are two optional solutions, and the second UE may determine to execute S205 or S206 according to acceptance of the first configuration information (or according to acceptance of N types of carrier configurations).
其中，如果N＝1，则第一配置信息指示了一种载波配置(例如第一载波配置)，则如 果第二UE完全不接受第一载波配置，则第二UE可以向第一UE发送拒绝信息。其中，第二UE完全不接受第一载波配置，是指第二UE不接受第一载波配置所配置的全部载波。Wherein, if N=1, then the first configuration information indicates a carrier configuration (for example, the first carrier configuration), then if If the second UE does not accept the first carrier configuration at all, the second UE may send rejection information to the first UE. Wherein, the second UE does not accept the first carrier configuration at all, which means that the second UE does not accept all carriers configured in the first carrier configuration.
如果N>1，则第一配置信息指示了多种载波配置。则如果第二UE完全不接受N种载波配置，则第二UE可以向第一UE发送拒绝信息。第二UE完全不接受N种载波配置，是指第二UE对于N种载波配置中的每种载波配置所配置的全部载波均不接受。If N>1, the first configuration information indicates multiple carrier configurations. Then, if the second UE does not accept the N types of carrier configurations at all, the second UE may send rejection information to the first UE. The second UE completely does not accept the N types of carrier configurations, which means that the second UE does not accept all the carriers configured for each carrier configuration in the N types of carrier configurations.
如果N种载波配置是第一UE确定的，则第一UE接收该拒绝信息后，可以不再配置第二UE，或者也可以重新为第二UE配置相应的载波，例如可再执行S201。如果N种载波配置是第一接入网设备确定的，则第一UE接收该拒绝信息后，可将该拒绝信息发送给第一接入网设备。第一接入网设备接收该拒绝信息后，可以不再配置第二UE，或者也可以重新为第二UE配置相应的载波并发送给第一UE，例如可再执行S201。If the N types of carrier configurations are determined by the first UE, after receiving the rejection information, the first UE may no longer configure the second UE, or may reconfigure a corresponding carrier for the second UE, for example, perform S201 again. If the N carrier configurations are determined by the first access network device, the first UE may send the rejection information to the first access network device after receiving the rejection information. After receiving the rejection information, the first access network device may no longer configure the second UE, or may reconfigure a corresponding carrier for the second UE and send it to the first UE, for example, S201 may be performed again.
S207、第二UE向第一UE发送第二配置信息。相应的，第一UE从第二UE接收第二配置信息。S207. The second UE sends second configuration information to the first UE. Correspondingly, the first UE receives second configuration information from the second UE.
如果第二UE不接受第一配置信息，则第二UE可以向第一UE发送拒绝信息，或者可以向第一UE发送第二配置信息。或者，即使第二UE接受第一配置信息，第二UE也可以向第一UE发送第二配置信息。可选的，第二UE在发送第二配置信息时，还可以向第一UE发送相应的指示，该指示可以携带在第二配置信息中，或者与第二配置信息一并发送。第一UE根据该指示可确定第二UE接受第一配置信息或不接受第一配置信息。S205～S207是三种可选的方案，第二UE可选择执行这三种方案中的一种。或者，S205和S206是两种可选的方案，S207可作为这两种方案中的任一种方案的进一步补充方案。If the second UE does not accept the first configuration information, the second UE may send rejection information to the first UE, or may send second configuration information to the first UE. Or, even if the second UE accepts the first configuration information, the second UE may send the second configuration information to the first UE. Optionally, when sending the second configuration information, the second UE may also send a corresponding indication to the first UE, and the indication may be carried in the second configuration information, or sent together with the second configuration information. According to the indication, the first UE may determine that the second UE accepts the first configuration information or does not accept the first configuration information. S205-S207 are three optional schemes, and the second UE may choose to execute one of these three schemes. Alternatively, S205 and S206 are two optional solutions, and S207 can be used as a further supplementary solution to either of these two solutions.
第二配置信息可指示一种或多种载波配置，这一种或多种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括一个或多个载波，这一个或多个载波包括用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息的载波，和/或用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息的载波。第二配置信息所指示的一种或多种载波配置，是第二UE所期望(或，想要；或，倾向；或，期望优先)的载波配置。The second configuration information may indicate one or more carrier configurations, each of the one or more carrier configurations includes one or more carriers, and the one or more carriers include information for the second UE to send to the first The carrier on which the UE sends information, and/or the carrier used for the first UE to send information to the second UE. The one or more carrier configurations indicated by the second configuration information are the carrier configurations expected (or wanted; or tended; or expected to be prioritized) by the second UE.
第一UE接收第二配置信息后，可以再次为第二UE配置载波，例如可重新执行S201，可选的，第一UE可将第二配置信息作为再次配置的参考因素。或者，如果由第一接入网设备为第二UE配置载波，则第一UE可将第二配置信息发送给第一接入网设备，第一接入网设备可再次为第二UE配置载波，并将配置的载波再发送给第一UE，例如可重新执行S201，可选的，第一接入网设备可将第二配置信息作为再次配置的参考因素。例如，如果第二UE除了向第一UE发送第二配置信息外，还向第一UE指示了第二UE不接受第一配置信息，则第一UE或接入网设备可以再次为第二UE配置载波。After receiving the second configuration information, the first UE may configure a carrier for the second UE again, for example, re-perform S201. Optionally, the first UE may use the second configuration information as a reference factor for reconfiguration. Alternatively, if the carrier is configured by the first access network device for the second UE, the first UE may send the second configuration information to the first access network device, and the first access network device may configure the carrier for the second UE again , and resend the configured carrier to the first UE. For example, S201 may be re-executed. Optionally, the first access network device may use the second configuration information as a reference factor for reconfiguration. For example, if the second UE not only sends the second configuration information to the first UE, but also indicates to the first UE that the second UE does not accept the first configuration information, the first UE or the access network device may again provide the second UE with Configure the carrier.
或者，第一UE接收第二配置信息后，可以暂时不为第二UE配置载波。但如果后续又需要为第二UE配置载波，则第二配置信息可作为后续配置的参考因素。例如，如果第二UE除了向第一UE发送第二配置信息外，还向第一UE指示了第二UE接受第一配置信息，则第一UE或接入网设备可以暂时不为第二UE配置载波，但可以存储第二配置信息，以供后续参考。Alternatively, after receiving the second configuration information, the first UE may temporarily not configure a carrier for the second UE. However, if the carrier needs to be configured for the second UE subsequently, the second configuration information may be used as a reference factor for the subsequent configuration. For example, if the second UE not only sends the second configuration information to the first UE, but also indicates to the first UE that the second UE accepts the first configuration information, the first UE or the access network device may temporarily not provide the configuration information for the second UE. The carrier is configured, but the second configuration information may be stored for subsequent reference.
在前文中，介绍的是第二UE完全接受第一配置信息或完全不接受第一配置信息。除此之外可能还有另一种情况，第二UE部分接受第一配置信息。例如，如果N＝1，则第一配置信息指示了一种载波配置(例如第一载波配置)。如果第二UE接受第一载波配置所配置的部分载波，而对于第一载波配置所配置的剩余载波，第二UE不接受，则视为第二UE部分接受第一配置信息。 In the foregoing, it is introduced that the second UE completely accepts the first configuration information or does not accept the first configuration information at all. In addition to this, there may be another situation where the second UE partially accepts the first configuration information. For example, if N=1, the first configuration information indicates a carrier configuration (for example, a first carrier configuration). If the second UE accepts part of the carriers configured by the first carrier configuration, but does not accept the remaining carriers configured by the first carrier configuration, it is deemed that the second UE partially accepts the first configuration information.
又例如，N>1，则第一配置信息指示了多种载波配置。如果对于这多种载波配置中的每种载波配置，第二UE接受所述每种载波配置所配置的部分载波，而对于所述每种载波配置所配置的剩余载波，第二UE不接受，这种情况视为第二UE部分接受第一配置信息。或者，如果对于这多种载波配置中至少一种载波配置中的每种载波配置，第二UE接受所述每种载波配置所配置的部分载波，而对于所述每种载波配置所配置的剩余载波，第二UE不接受，另外，对于多种载波配置中除了至少一种载波配置外剩余的载波配置，第二UE完全不接受，这种情况也视为第二UE部分接受第一配置信息。For another example, if N>1, the first configuration information indicates multiple carrier configurations. If, for each of the multiple carrier configurations, the second UE accepts some of the carriers configured for each carrier configuration, and for the remaining carriers configured for each carrier configuration, the second UE does not accept, In this case, it is considered that the second UE partially accepts the first configuration information. Or, if for each carrier configuration in at least one of the multiple carrier configurations, the second UE accepts part of the carriers configured for each carrier configuration, and for the rest of the carrier configurations configured for each carrier configuration Carrier, the second UE does not accept it. In addition, the second UE does not accept the rest of the carrier configurations except at least one carrier configuration among the multiple carrier configurations. This situation is also regarded as the second UE partially accepting the first configuration information. .
如果第二UE部分接受第一配置信息，则一种处理方式为，第二UE执行S206，即，由于第二UE不能完全接受第一配置信息，则第二UE可以按照拒绝方式处理，对于第一配置信息所指示的载波配置中原本能够接收的载波配置也一并拒绝。If the second UE partially accepts the first configuration information, one processing method is that the second UE performs S206, that is, because the second UE cannot fully accept the first configuration information, the second UE may process it in a rejecting manner. Among the carrier configurations indicated by the configuration information, the originally receivable carrier configurations are also rejected.
或者，如果第二UE部分接受第一配置信息，则另一种处理方式为，第二UE执行S205。可选的，此时的确认信息可以指示第二UE所接受的载波配置。其中，如果第二UE能够接受两种或两种以上的载波配置中的部分载波，则第二UE可从中选择一种载波配置作为确认接受的载波配置。例如N＝1，第二UE接受第一载波配置所包括的部分载波，则该确认信息可以指示这部分载波；又例如，N>1，第二UE接受多种载波配置中的每种载波配置所包括的部分载波，那么第二UE可从中选择一种载波配置，该确认信息可指示该载波配置，以及指示第二UE在该载波配置中所接受的载波；再例如，N>1，第二UE接受至少一种载波配置中的每种载波配置所包括的部分载波，那么，如果至少一种载波配置的数量为1，则该确认信息可指示该载波配置，以及指示第二UE在该载波配置中所接受的载波，或者，如果至少一种载波配置的数量大于1，则第二UE可从中选择一种载波配置，该确认信息可指示该载波配置，以及指示第二UE在该载波配置中所接受的载波。第一UE根据该确认信息就能确定第二UE所接受的载波，从而第一UE和第二UE可以利用第二UE所接受的载波进行通信，无需再为第二UE配置载波，能够提高载波配置的效率。Or, if the second UE partially accepts the first configuration information, another processing manner is that the second UE performs S205. Optionally, the confirmation information at this time may indicate the carrier configuration accepted by the second UE. Wherein, if the second UE can accept part of the carriers in two or more carrier configurations, the second UE may select one of the carrier configurations as the carrier configuration for acknowledging acceptance. For example, N=1, the second UE accepts part of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration, and the confirmation information may indicate this part of carriers; another example, N>1, the second UE accepts each carrier configuration in multiple carrier configurations part of the carriers included, the second UE can select a carrier configuration, and the confirmation information can indicate the carrier configuration and the carriers accepted by the second UE in the carrier configuration; for another example, N>1, the first The second UE accepts the partial carriers included in each carrier configuration in at least one carrier configuration, then, if the number of at least one carrier configuration is 1, the confirmation information may indicate the carrier configuration, and indicate that the second UE is in the carrier configuration. Accepted carriers in the carrier configuration, or, if the number of at least one carrier configuration is greater than 1, the second UE may select a carrier configuration, the confirmation information may indicate the carrier configuration, and indicate that the second UE is on the carrier Carriers accepted in the configuration. According to the confirmation information, the first UE can determine the carrier accepted by the second UE, so that the first UE and the second UE can use the carrier accepted by the second UE to communicate, and there is no need to configure a carrier for the second UE, and the carrier can be improved. configuration efficiency.
或者，如果第二UE部分接受第一配置信息，则再一种处理方式为，第二UE执行S207。即，第二UE可将期望的第二配置信息发送给第一UE，第一UE或第一接入网设备可以立刻重新为第二UE配置载波，或者也可以暂时不为第二UE重新配置载波。那么，如果第一UE或第一接入网设备没有为第二UE重新配置载波，则第一UE和第二UE可以使用第二UE接受的配置进行通信。Or, if the second UE partially accepts the first configuration information, another processing manner is that the second UE executes S207. That is, the second UE may send desired second configuration information to the first UE, and the first UE or the first access network device may immediately reconfigure the carrier for the second UE, or may not reconfigure the carrier for the second UE temporarily. carrier. Then, if the first UE or the first access network device does not reconfigure the carrier for the second UE, the first UE and the second UE can use the configuration accepted by the second UE to communicate.
本申请实施例中，第一UE可以向第二UE发送第一配置信息，第一配置信息指示的载波配置可指示用于第一UE向第二UE发送信息的载波，和/或指示用于第二UE向第一UE发送信息的载波。那么第二UE根据第一配置信息，就能确定第二UE应该在哪个或哪些载波上接收来自第一UE的信息，和/或确定第二UE应该在哪个或哪些载波上向第一UE发送信息。相当于，通过第一配置信息能够使得收发双方都明确双方通信所使用的载波，例如发送端可以在接收端所接受的全部或部分载波上发送信息，接收端可以在所接受的全部载波上监听/接收，从而发送端所发送的信息能够被接收端正确接收，提高了接收端的接收成功率。而且如果第二UE不接受第一配置信息，第二UE可以拒绝第一配置信息，第一UE可重新为第二UE配置，如果第二UE继续拒绝，则第一UE可以继续配置；或者，如果第二UE不接受第一配置信息，第二UE可以向第一UE指示第二UE所期望的载波配置，第一UE可据此重新为第二UE配置载波，如果第二UE继续拒绝，则第一UE可以继续配置；或者，即使第二UE接受第一配置信息，第二UE也可以向第一UE指示第二UE 所期望的载波配置，第一UE可以据此重新为第二UE配置载波，或者也可以作为后续为第二UE配置载波的参考。如上相当于第一UE和第二UE的协商过程，更有利于确定第一UE和第二UE都能接受的载波。In this embodiment of the present application, the first UE may send the first configuration information to the second UE, and the carrier configuration indicated by the first configuration information may indicate the carrier used for the first UE to send information to the second UE, and/or indicate the carrier used for The carrier on which the second UE sends information to the first UE. Then, according to the first configuration information, the second UE can determine on which carrier(s) the second UE should receive information from the first UE, and/or determine which carrier(s) the second UE should send to the first UE. information. Equivalently, through the first configuration information, both the sending and receiving parties can specify the carrier used by the two parties for communication. For example, the sending end can send information on all or part of the carriers accepted by the receiving end, and the receiving end can listen on all accepted carriers. /Receive, so that the information sent by the sending end can be correctly received by the receiving end, which improves the receiving success rate of the receiving end. Moreover, if the second UE does not accept the first configuration information, the second UE may reject the first configuration information, and the first UE may reconfigure the second UE, and if the second UE continues to reject, the first UE may continue to configure; or, If the second UE does not accept the first configuration information, the second UE can indicate to the first UE the carrier configuration expected by the second UE, and the first UE can reconfigure the carrier for the second UE accordingly. If the second UE continues to refuse, Then the first UE can continue to configure; or, even if the second UE accepts the first configuration information, the second UE can also indicate to the first UE that the second UE The desired carrier configuration, based on which the first UE may reconfigure the carrier for the second UE, or may be used as a reference for subsequent configuration of the carrier for the second UE. The above is equivalent to the negotiation process between the first UE and the second UE, and is more conducive to determining a carrier acceptable to both the first UE and the second UE.
第一UE与第二UE之间传输的数据量可能并不均衡。例如某些时间段内可能传输的数据量较多，而某些时间段内传输的数据量较少。本申请实施例考虑到，如果第二UE始终在配置给第二UE的全部载波上监听/接收，对于第二UE来说功耗较大。鉴于此，本申请实施例提供第二种通信方法，通过该方法，能够减小第二UE的功耗。请参考图3，为该方法的流程图。The amount of data transmitted between the first UE and the second UE may not be balanced. For example, a large amount of data may be transmitted in certain time periods, while a small amount of data may be transmitted in certain time periods. The embodiment of the present application considers that if the second UE always monitors/receives on all the carriers configured for the second UE, the power consumption of the second UE is relatively high. In view of this, the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication method, through which the power consumption of the second UE can be reduced. Please refer to FIG. 3 , which is a flowchart of the method.
S301、第一UE向第二UE发送第一指示信息。相应的，第二UE从第一UE接收第一指示信息。第一指示信息可指示激活(或，使用；或，应用)第二载波，或指示去激活(或，不再使用)第三载波。例如第一UE为数据发送端，第二UE为数据接收端，第二UE可接收来自第一UE的数据。第二载波是在接收第一指示信息前尚未激活的载波，第三载波是在接收第一指示信息前已激活的载波。本申请实施例以第一UE和第二UE使用图2所示的实施例所介绍的第一载波配置进行通信为例，第二载波例如是M个载波中的一个或多个载波，第三载波例如是M个载波中的一个或多个载波，第二载波与第三载波不同。关于M个载波的介绍可参考图2所示的实施例。S301. The first UE sends first indication information to the second UE. Correspondingly, the second UE receives the first indication information from the first UE. The first indication information may indicate to activate (or use; or apply) the second carrier, or indicate to deactivate (or no longer use) the third carrier. For example, the first UE is a data sending end, the second UE is a data receiving end, and the second UE can receive data from the first UE. The second carrier is a carrier that has not been activated before receiving the first indication information, and the third carrier is a carrier that has been activated before receiving the first indication information. In this embodiment of the present application, the first UE and the second UE communicate using the first carrier configuration introduced in the embodiment shown in FIG. The carrier is, for example, one or more carriers among the M carriers, and the second carrier is different from the third carrier. For the introduction of M carriers, refer to the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 .
第一指示信息要指示激活第二载波，例如可包括第二载波的频率信息，或包括第二载波的索引。同理，第一指示信息要指示去激活第三载波，例如可包括第三载波的频率信息，或包括第三载波的索引。另外，为了区分激活和去激活，第一指示信息还可携带相应的指示，例如，如果第一指示信息指示激活第二载波，则第一指示信息可包括第二载波的频率信息或索引，以及包括激活指示；如果第一指示信息指示去激活第三载波，则第一指示信息可包括第三载波的频率信息或索引，以及包括去激活指示。或者，第一指示信息也可以不额外携带激活指示或去激活指示，而是通过隐式方式来指示激活或去激活。一种隐式方式例如为，通过不同格式的第一指示信息指示激活或去激活；又一种隐式方式例如为，通过第一指示信息的不同的加扰方式指示激活或去激活。其中，关于载波的频率信息以及索引等内容可参考图2所示的实施例的介绍。The first indication information indicates to activate the second carrier, for example, may include frequency information of the second carrier, or include an index of the second carrier. Similarly, the first indication information indicates to deactivate the third carrier, for example, may include frequency information of the third carrier, or include an index of the third carrier. In addition, in order to distinguish between activation and deactivation, the first indication information may also carry a corresponding indication, for example, if the first indication information indicates activation of the second carrier, the first indication information may include frequency information or an index of the second carrier, and An activation indication is included; if the first indication information indicates deactivation of the third carrier, the first indication information may include frequency information or an index of the third carrier, and the deactivation indication. Alternatively, the first indication information may not additionally carry the activation indication or the deactivation indication, but indicate the activation or deactivation in an implicit manner. An implicit manner is, for example, indicating activation or deactivation through first indication information in different formats; another implicit manner is, for example, indicating activation or deactivation through different scrambling manners of the first indication information. Wherein, for content such as frequency information and indexes of carriers, reference may be made to the introduction of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 .
当第一UE待向第二UE发送的数据量较大时，可以使用较多的载波进行传输，不同的载波可传输不同的数据，由此可以减少数据到达第二UE的延迟。或者，当第一UE待向第二UE发送的数据量较小时，可以使用较少的载波进行传输，因为数据量较小，因此使用较少的载波传输可能不会导致数据到达第二UE的延迟过大，而第二UE可以在较少的载波上进行监听/接收，有助于减少第二UE的功耗。因此本申请实施例提出，用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波可以动态变化。When the amount of data to be sent by the first UE to the second UE is large, more carriers can be used for transmission, and different carriers can transmit different data, thereby reducing the delay of data reaching the second UE. Or, when the amount of data to be sent by the first UE to the second UE is small, fewer carriers may be used for transmission, because the amount of data is smaller, so the use of fewer carriers for transmission may not cause the data to reach the second UE. The delay is too large, but the second UE can monitor/receive on fewer carriers, which helps to reduce the power consumption of the second UE. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application proposes that the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE may change dynamically.
可选的，如果第一UE确定了用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波，且这些载波与第二UE当前激活的载波部分不同或全部不同，第一UE可以向第二UE发送第一指示信息。例如，如果第一UE确定用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波发生变化，则第一UE可以向第二UE发送第一指示信息。或者，如果第一UE为第二UE配置了载波，但尚未激活所配置的载波，则第一UE也可以向第二UE发送第一指示信息，此时第一指示信息可指示激活第二载波。第一UE要确定用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波，可能有多种方式，下面举例介绍。Optionally, if the first UE determines the carriers used for the first UE to send data to the second UE, and these carriers are partially or completely different from the carriers currently activated by the second UE, the first UE may send the data to the second UE. The first instruction message. For example, if the first UE determines that the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE changes, the first UE may send the first indication information to the second UE. Alternatively, if the first UE configures a carrier for the second UE but has not yet activated the configured carrier, the first UE may also send the first indication information to the second UE, and at this time the first indication information may indicate activation of the second carrier . There may be multiple ways for the first UE to determine the carrier used for sending data from the first UE to the second UE, which are described below with examples.
1、第一种方式，根据来自第一接入网设备的指示确定。第一接入网设备为第一UE的 服务接入网设备。例如，如果第一UE处于RRC连接态，或第一UE采用接入网设备调度资源的模式来发送信息时，可以使用第一种方式。1. The first way is determined according to an instruction from the first access network device. The first access network device is the first UE Service access network equipment. For example, if the first UE is in the RRC connection state, or when the first UE sends information in a resource scheduling mode of an access network device, the first method may be used.
第一接入网设备如果确定了用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波，则可以向第一UE发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息可指示激活第二载波，或指示去激活第三载波。可选的，如果第一接入网设备之前曾经确定过用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波，则如果本次所确定的载波与上次所确定的载波部分不同或完全不同，第一接入网设备可以向第一UE发送第二指示信息；而如果本次所确定的载波与上次所确定的载波相同，第一接入网设备可以不必向第一UE发送第二指示信息。第一UE接收第二指示信息后，就可以向第二UE发送第一指示信息。其中，如果第二指示信息指示激活第二载波，则第一指示信息指示激活第二载波；如果第二指示信息指示去激活第三载波，则第一指示信息指示去激活第三载波。If the first access network device determines the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE, it may send second indication information to the first UE, and the second indication information may indicate activation of the second carrier or deactivation third carrier. Optionally, if the first access network device has previously determined a carrier for the first UE to send data to the second UE, if the carrier determined this time is partially or completely different from the carrier determined last time, The first access network device may send the second indication information to the first UE; and if the carrier determined this time is the same as the carrier determined last time, the first access network device may not send the second indication to the first UE information. After receiving the second indication information, the first UE may send the first indication information to the second UE. Wherein, if the second indication information indicates activation of the second carrier, the first indication information indicates activation of the second carrier; if the second indication information indicates deactivation of the third carrier, the first indication information indicates deactivation of the third carrier.
可选的，第一接入网设备用于确定载波的部分因素或全部因素，来自第一UE。例如第一UE可以向第一接入网设备发送第二参数，第二参数可用于辅助第一接入网设备确定载波是否发生变化。第二参数例如包括如下一项或多项：第一UE与第二UE之间的业务的服务质量(quality of service，QoS)信息，第二UE所接受的载波中的部分或全部载波的CBR信息，或，第一UE缓存的数据量信息。其中，第二UE所接受的载波例如包括第一载波配置中的全部或部分载波。Optionally, some or all of the factors used by the first access network device to determine the carrier come from the first UE. For example, the first UE may send the second parameter to the first access network device, and the second parameter may be used to assist the first access network device in determining whether the carrier changes. The second parameter includes, for example, one or more of the following: service quality (quality of service, QoS) information between the first UE and the second UE, CBR of some or all carriers in the carriers accepted by the second UE information, or information about the amount of data buffered by the first UE. Wherein, the carriers accepted by the second UE include, for example, all or part of the carriers in the first carrier configuration.
第一UE与第二UE之间的业务的QoS信息可包括如下一项或多项：PC5接口5G QoS标识(PC5 5G QoS identifier，PQI)、保证流量比特率(guaranteed flow bit rate，GFBR)、最大流量比特率(maximum flow bit rate，MFBR)、PC5链路聚合最大比特率(PC5link aggregate maximum bit rate，PC5Link-AMBR)、或距离(range)。其中，所述距离的值可指示第一UE与第二UE之间的PC5通信中的PC5QoS参数适用的距离，即，当数据接收端(例如第二UE)与数据发送端(例如第一UE)之间的距离超出了SL QoS profile指示的距离(range)时，PC5通信是尽力而为的，或者说，无法保证PC5通信质量。其中，PQI可指示如下PC5QoS参数中的一个或多个：资源类型(resource type)、优先级量级(priority level)、包时延预算(packet delay budget，PDB)、包错误率(packet error rate，PER)、滑动窗口(averaging window)、或最大数据突发量(maximum data burst volume，MDBV)。其中，resource type可以是保证比特速率(guaranteed bit rate，GBR)，延时关键GBR(delay critical GBR)或非GBR(non-GBR))。The QoS information of the service between the first UE and the second UE may include one or more of the following: PC5 interface 5G QoS identifier (PC5 5G QoS identifier, PQI), guaranteed flow bit rate (guaranteed flow bit rate, GFBR), Maximum flow bit rate (maximum flow bit rate, MFBR), PC5 link aggregate maximum bit rate (PC5link aggregate maximum bit rate, PC5Link-AMBR), or distance (range). Wherein, the value of the distance may indicate the applicable distance of the PC5QoS parameter in the PC5 communication between the first UE and the second UE, that is, when the data receiving end (for example, the second UE) and the data sending end (for example, the first UE) ) exceeds the distance (range) indicated by the SL QoS profile, PC5 communication is best-effort, or in other words, PC5 communication quality cannot be guaranteed. Wherein, the PQI may indicate one or more of the following PC5QoS parameters: resource type (resource type), priority level (priority level), packet delay budget (packet delay budget, PDB), packet error rate (packet error rate , PER), sliding window (averaging window), or maximum data burst volume (MDBV). Among them, the resource type can be guaranteed bit rate (guaranteed bit rate, GBR), delay critical GBR (delay critical GBR) or non-GBR (non-GBR)).
第一UE缓存的数据量信息，可以是第一UE的缓冲区存储的数据量的信息，例如为第一UE的sidelink缓存状态报告(buffer status report，BSR)，该sidelink BSR可包含第一UE的缓冲区大小信息。第一UE缓存的数据，例如包括待发送给第二UE的数据。The data volume information cached by the first UE may be information on the data volume stored in the buffer zone of the first UE, such as a sidelink buffer status report (buffer status report, BSR) of the first UE, and the sidelink BSR may include the first UE buffer size information. The data buffered by the first UE includes, for example, data to be sent to the second UE.
例如，第一UE缓存的数据量信息表明第一UE缓存的数据量较多，可能需要较多的载波传输，则第一接入网设备可以指示激活第二载波，以满足数据传输需求，减小数据传输时延。For example, the data volume information cached by the first UE indicates that the first UE caches a large amount of data and may require more carrier transmission, then the first access network device may instruct to activate the second carrier to meet the data transmission requirements and reduce Small data transmission delay.
又例如，如果第三载波的CBR值较小，表明第三载波较为空闲，或者说，表明第三载波当前可能并未使用，那么第一接入网设备可以确定去激活第三载波，从而第二UE无需继续在第三载波上监听/接收，以减小第二UE的功耗。For another example, if the CBR value of the third carrier is small, indicating that the third carrier is relatively idle, or in other words, indicating that the third carrier may not be currently in use, then the first access network device may determine to deactivate the third carrier, so that the third carrier The second UE does not need to continue to monitor/receive on the third carrier, so as to reduce the power consumption of the second UE.
第一接入网设备可根据第二参数确定是否激活或去激活第一UE与第二UE之间的相应载波，或者第一接入网设备除了可参考第二参数外，还可参考其他因素，对于第一接入 网设备的具体实现方式不做限制。The first access network device may determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier between the first UE and the second UE according to the second parameter, or the first access network device may refer to other factors in addition to the second parameter , for the first access The specific implementation manner of the network device is not limited.
2、第二种方式，第一UE自行确定。例如，如果第一UE处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，或第一UE采用UE自主选择资源的模式来发送信息时，可以使用第二种方式。2. In the second manner, the first UE determines by itself. For example, if the first UE is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, or the first UE sends information in a mode in which the UE independently selects resources, the second method may be used.
在第二种方式下，第一UE可根据第一参数来确定是否激活或去激活用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波。第一参数例如包括如下一项或多项：第一UE与第二UE之间的业务的QoS信息，第二UE所接受的载波中的部分或全部载波的CBR信息，或，第一UE缓存的数据量信息。关于这些参数的介绍，可参考上文。第一参数与第二参数可以是相同的参数，或者也可以完全不同或部分不同。In the second manner, the first UE may determine according to the first parameter whether to activate or deactivate the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE. The first parameter includes, for example, one or more of the following: QoS information of the service between the first UE and the second UE, CBR information of some or all of the carriers accepted by the second UE, or the cached information of the first UE data volume information. For the introduction of these parameters, please refer to the above. The first parameter and the second parameter may be the same parameter, or may be completely or partially different.
3、第三种方式，第一UE自行确定。与第二种方式不同的是，在第三种方式下，第一UE可根据第一条件来确定。无论第一UE处于RRC连接态、RRC空闲态还是RRC非激活态，也无论第一UE采用UE自主选择资源的模式发送信息还是采用接入网设备调度资源的模式来发送信息，第一UE都可以采用第三种方式来确定是否激活或去激活用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波。3. In the third way, the first UE determines by itself. Different from the second manner, in the third manner, the first UE may be determined according to the first condition. Regardless of whether the first UE is in the RRC connected state, the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state, and whether the first UE sends information in the mode of UE autonomously selecting resources or in the mode of resource scheduling by access network equipment, the first UE will A third manner may be used to determine whether to activate or deactivate the carrier used for the first UE to send data to the second UE.
可选的，第一条件可以来自第一接入网设备。例如第一接入网设备通过单播消息向第一UE配置第一条件，或者第一条件可以包括在***消息中，第一UE可通过接收来自第一接入网设备的***消息获得第一消息。例如，如果第一UE处于RRC连接态，或者第一UE采用接入网设备调度资源的模式，则第一条件可以是第一接入网设备配置的。Optionally, the first condition may come from the first access network device. For example, the first access network device configures the first condition to the first UE through a unicast message, or the first condition may be included in a system message, and the first UE may obtain the first condition by receiving the system message from the first access network device. information. For example, if the first UE is in the RRC connection state, or the first UE adopts a resource scheduling mode of the access network device, the first condition may be configured by the first access network device.
或者，第一条件可以预配置在第一UE中。Alternatively, the first condition may be preconfigured in the first UE.
或者，第一条件也可以来自第二UE，第二UE可以向第一UE配置第一条件。Alternatively, the first condition may also come from the second UE, and the second UE may configure the first condition to the first UE.
或者，第一条件也可以是第一UE自行确定的。Alternatively, the first condition may also be determined by the first UE itself.
可选的，第一条件为数据量条件。第一UE可根据第一UE待传输的数据量，确定是否激活或去激活用于第一UE向第二UE发送数据的载波。Optionally, the first condition is a data volume condition. The first UE may determine whether to activate or deactivate a carrier for the first UE to send data to the second UE according to the amount of data to be transmitted by the first UE.
例如一种数据量条件包括第一门限与载波数量之间的对应关系，第一门限也可称为数据量门限。如果第一UE待传输的数据量小于某个第一门限，则第一UE能够使用(或，激活)的载波数量应该小于或等于该第一门限所对应的载波数量。例如，该对应关系可包括至少一个第一门限和至少一个载波数量，第一门限与载波数量可以一一对应。可理解为，该对应关系包括至少一个子关系，其中的一个子关系为一个第一门限与一个载波数量之间的对应关系。其中一个子关系例如为，第一门限1对应的载波数量为3。那么，如果第一UE待传输的数据量小于第一门限1，则第一UE能够使用的载波数量应该小于或等于3。如果第一UE当前已激活的载波数量等于3，则第一UE无需进行激活或去激活操作，即，无需执行S301；或者，如果第一UE当前已激活的载波数量小于3，则第一UE可以不执行S301，即，不执行激活或去激活操作，或者，第一UE也可以执行S301，例如第一指示信息指示激活第二载波；或者，如果第一UE当前已激活的载波数量大于3，则第一UE可执行S301，例如第一指示信息指示去激活第三载波。For example, a data volume condition includes a correspondence between a first threshold and the number of carriers, and the first threshold may also be referred to as a data volume threshold. If the amount of data to be transmitted by the first UE is less than a certain first threshold, the number of carriers that the first UE can use (or activate) should be less than or equal to the number of carriers corresponding to the first threshold. For example, the corresponding relationship may include at least one first threshold and at least one number of carriers, and the first threshold and the number of carriers may be in one-to-one correspondence. It can be understood that the corresponding relationship includes at least one sub-relationship, and one of the sub-relationships is a corresponding relationship between a first threshold and a number of carriers. One of the sub-relationships is, for example, that the number of carriers corresponding to the first threshold 1 is 3. Then, if the amount of data to be transmitted by the first UE is less than the first threshold 1, the number of carriers that the first UE can use should be less than or equal to 3. If the number of carriers currently activated by the first UE is equal to 3, the first UE does not need to perform an activation or deactivation operation, that is, there is no need to perform S301; or, if the number of carriers currently activated by the first UE is less than 3, the first UE S301 may not be performed, that is, the activation or deactivation operation is not performed, or the first UE may also perform S301, for example, the first indication information indicates activation of the second carrier; or, if the number of carriers currently activated by the first UE is greater than 3 , the first UE may perform S301, for example, the first indication information indicates to deactivate the third carrier.
该对应关系可适用于所有的CBR，或者，不同的CBR可以适用不同的对应关系。例如，可以划分CBR范围，对于不同的CBR范围可以配置不同的对应关系，使得所确定的载波数量更为符合当前载波的使用情况。This correspondence can be applied to all CBRs, or different CBRs can have different correspondences. For example, the CBR range can be divided, and different corresponding relationships can be configured for different CBR ranges, so that the determined number of carriers is more in line with the current carrier usage.
又例如，另一种数据量条件包括，如果第一UE待传输的数据量大于或等于第一门限，则第一UE激活第二载波；或者，如果第一UE待传输的数据量小于第二门限，则第一UE去激活第三载波。其中，第二载波可以是预先确定的载波，或者是与第一门限关联的载波， 或者是第一UE自行选择的载波。同理，第三载波可以是预先确定的载波，或者是与第二门限关联的载波，或者是第一UE自行选择的载波。第二门限可以小于或等于第一门限。这种条件较为简单，易于实现。For another example, another data volume condition includes, if the data volume to be transmitted by the first UE is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first UE activates the second carrier; or, if the data volume to be transmitted by the first UE is less than the second threshold threshold, the first UE deactivates the third carrier. Wherein, the second carrier may be a predetermined carrier, or a carrier associated with the first threshold, Or it is a carrier selected by the first UE itself. Similarly, the third carrier may be a predetermined carrier, or a carrier associated with the second threshold, or a carrier selected by the first UE. The second threshold may be less than or equal to the first threshold. This condition is relatively simple and easy to implement.
可选的，无论第一UE通过如上哪种方式来确定是否激活或去激活相应的载波，如果第一UE处于RRC连接态，或第一UE采用接入网设备调度资源的模式发送信息，则第一UE如果执行了S301，还可以向第一接入网设备发送信息，该信息可指示相应的载波已被激活或去激活。Optionally, no matter which method the first UE uses to determine whether to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier, if the first UE is in the RRC connection state, or the first UE uses the access network device scheduling resource mode to send information, then If the first UE executes S301, it may also send information to the first access network device, where the information may indicate that the corresponding carrier has been activated or deactivated.
S302、第二UE启动或重启定时器。S302. The second UE starts or restarts a timer.
例如第一指示信息指示去激活第三载波，但第二UE未收到第一指示信息，则第二UE还会继续在第三载波上监听/接收，造成第二UE的功率浪费。另外，如果第一UE待传输的数据量较小，在某一载波上一段时间都没有向第二UE发送数据，但第一UE又没有指示去激活该载波，则第二UE就会一直在该载波上进行监听/接收，也造成第二UE的功率浪费。For example, the first indication information indicates to deactivate the third carrier, but the second UE does not receive the first indication information, then the second UE will continue to monitor/receive on the third carrier, resulting in waste of power of the second UE. In addition, if the amount of data to be transmitted by the first UE is small and has not sent data to the second UE on a certain carrier for a period of time, but the first UE has not instructed to deactivate the carrier, the second UE will always be on Monitoring/receiving on the carrier also causes waste of power of the second UE.
考虑到如上情况，本申请实施例提出，第二UE可以针对载波维护定时器，从而通过定时器来控制载波(或传输功能)的激活或去激活。第二UE维护定时器，可以有不同的方式，下面举例介绍。Considering the above situation, the embodiment of the present application proposes that the second UE may maintain a timer for the carrier, so as to control the activation or deactivation of the carrier (or transmission function) through the timer. The second UE maintains the timer in different manners, and an example is introduced below.
1、第一种方式。1. The first way.
在这种方式下，第二UE对于不同的载波可以分别维护一个定时器，例如称为第一定时器，第一定时器的数量与第二UE被配置(或，第二UE接受)的载波的数量相同。第一定时器的定时时长可由第一UE配置，或者由第一接入网设备配置，或者也可以预配置在第二UE中。In this way, the second UE can maintain a timer for different carriers, for example called the first timer, the number of the first timer is the same as the carrier configured (or accepted by the second UE) the same amount. The timing duration of the first timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the second UE.
本申请实施例中，第二UE可以在如下的一种或多种情况下启动或重启一个载波对应的第一定时器：该载波被激活时，在该载波上从第一UE接收信息时，或，在该载波上向第一UE发送信息时。In this embodiment of the application, the second UE may start or restart a first timer corresponding to a carrier under one or more of the following conditions: when the carrier is activated, when receiving information from the first UE on the carrier, Or, when sending information to the first UE on the carrier.
例如第一指示信息指示激活第二载波，则第二UE在接收第一指示信息完毕时，可以启动或重启第二载波对应的第一定时器。例如，第一指示信息承载在物理侧行共享信道(physical sidelink share channel，PSSCH)中，那么第二UE可以在该PSSCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第一定时器。本申请实施例中，时间单元例如为子帧(subframe)、时隙(slot)、正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)符号(symbol)、或毫秒等。For example, the first indication information indicates activation of the second carrier, and the second UE may start or restart the first timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information. For example, the first indication information is carried in a physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink share channel, PSSCH), then the second UE may start or restart the first timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH. In this embodiment of the present application, the time unit is, for example, a subframe (subframe), a time slot (slot), an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing, OFDM) symbol (symbol), or a millisecond.
如果第二UE在某个载波上接收了来自第一UE的侧行控制信息(sidelink control information，SCI)、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)协议数据单元(protocol data unit，PDU)中的一项或多项，则第二UE可以启动或重启该载波所对应的第一定时器。例如，第二UE可以在接收来自第一UE的信息(该信息例如包括SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项)结束后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启相应的第一定时器。可选的，用于触发第二UE启动或重启该载波对应的第一定时器的SCI可以满足：该SCI包含的source layer-1ID为第一UE的layer-2ID的低8位(8最低有效位(least significant bit，LSB))，并且，该SCI包含的destination layer-1ID为第二UE的layer-2ID的低8位(8LSB)。If the second UE receives sidelink control information (sidelink control information, SCI), PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or media access control (media access control, MAC) protocol data unit ( protocol data unit, PDU), the second UE can start or restart the first timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, the second UE may start at the first time unit after receiving information from the first UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU) Or restart the corresponding first timer. Optionally, the SCI used to trigger the second UE to start or restart the first timer corresponding to the carrier may satisfy: the source layer-1ID contained in the SCI is the lower 8 bits of the layer-2ID of the first UE (8 is the least effective bit (least significant bit, LSB)), and the destination layer-1ID contained in the SCI is the lower 8 bits (8LSB) of the layer-2ID of the second UE.
如果第二UE在某个载波上向第一UE发送了SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC  PDU等信息中的一项或多项，则第二UE可以启动或重启该载波所对应的第一定时器。例如，第二UE可以在向第一UE发送信息(该信息例如包括SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项)结束后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启相应的第一定时器。If the second UE sends SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC to the first UE on a certain carrier If one or more items of the PDU and other information are used, the second UE may start or restart the first timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, at the first time unit after the second UE sends information to the first UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU), start or The corresponding first timer is restarted.
例如，第二UE在接收用于指示激活第二载波的第一指示信息后，启动了第二载波对应的第一定时器。在该第一定时器超时前，第二UE又在第二载波上接收了来自第一UE的PSSCH或在第二载波上向第一UE发送了MAC PDU，那么第二UE可以重启该第一定时器。For example, the second UE starts the first timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information for indicating activation of the second carrier. Before the first timer expires, the second UE receives the PSSCH from the first UE on the second carrier or sends a MAC PDU to the first UE on the second carrier, then the second UE can restart the first UE. timer.
在第一种方式下，在第二UE启动或重启某个载波对应的第一定时器后，如果该第一定时器超时，则第二UE可以去激活该第一定时器所对应的载波。如果第二UE去激活了某个载波，则第二UE不再监听/接收该载波，或者说，不再在该载波上监听或接收信息。这样，即使第二UE未收到来自第一UE的用于去激活该载波的指示，或第一UE未向第二UE指示去激活载波，第二UE也可以通过第一定时器来自行去激活相应的载波，以减小第二UE因为监听/接收所带来的功耗。或者，如果第二UE去激活了某个载波，则第二UE可以不再在该载波上监听/接收来自第一UE的信息，以及也不再在该载波上向第一UE发送信息，即，第二UE不再在该载波上与第一UE通信。但是第二UE还是可以继续利用该载波与其他UE通信，例如第二UE可以继续在该载波上向其他UE发送信息，和/或在该载波上监听/接收来自其他UE的信息，这样可以提高载波的利用率。In the first manner, after the second UE starts or restarts the first timer corresponding to a certain carrier, if the first timer times out, the second UE may deactivate the carrier corresponding to the first timer. If the second UE deactivates a certain carrier, the second UE no longer monitors/receives the carrier, or in other words, no longer monitors or receives information on the carrier. In this way, even if the second UE does not receive an instruction to deactivate the carrier from the first UE, or the first UE does not instruct the second UE to deactivate the carrier, the second UE can also deactivate the carrier by itself through the first timer. The corresponding carrier is activated to reduce the power consumption of the second UE due to monitoring/receiving. Or, if the second UE deactivates a certain carrier, the second UE may no longer monitor/receive information from the first UE on the carrier, and no longer send information to the first UE on the carrier, that is , the second UE no longer communicates with the first UE on the carrier. However, the second UE can continue to use the carrier to communicate with other UEs, for example, the second UE can continue to send information to other UEs on the carrier, and/or monitor/receive information from other UEs on the carrier, which can improve carrier utilization.
也就是说，第一种方式下所述的某个UE“去激活”某个载波，可以是指该UE不在该载波上与任意UE通信，即，UE不再使用该载波；相应的，UE“激活”某个载波，可以是指UE开始在该载波上与任意UE通信，即，UE开始使用该载波。那么S301中的第一指示信息可以指示UE“去激活”第三载波或指示UE“激活”第二载波。That is to say, the "deactivation" of a certain carrier by a certain UE mentioned in the first method may mean that the UE does not communicate with any UE on the carrier, that is, the UE no longer uses the carrier; correspondingly, the UE "Activating" a certain carrier may mean that the UE starts to communicate with any UE on the carrier, that is, the UE starts to use the carrier. Then the first indication information in S301 may instruct the UE to "deactivate" the third carrier or instruct the UE to "activate" the second carrier.
或者，UE“去激活”某个载波，也可以是指UE不再在该载波上与某个UE通信，但不限制UE是否在该载波上与其他UE通信；相应的，UE“激活”某个载波，可以是指UE开始在该载波上与某个UE通信，而对于该UE在该载波上与其他UE的通信则不限制。那么S301中的第一指示信息如果指示UE“去激活”第三载波，具体可以指示UE去激活第二UE在第三载波上的某种传输功能，而第一指示信息如果指示UE“激活”第二载波，具体可以指示UE激活第二UE在该载波上的该传输功能。该传输功能例如包括第二UE向第一UE发送信息的功能，以及包括第二UE从第一UE接收信息的功能。另外，如果第一指示信息指示UE“去激活”第三载波，则UE除了去激活第二UE在第三载波上的该传输功能外，还可以关闭第三载波对应的第一定时器。Or, "deactivating" a certain carrier by the UE may also mean that the UE no longer communicates with a certain UE on the carrier, but it does not limit whether the UE communicates with other UEs on the carrier; correspondingly, the UE "activates" a certain carrier. A carrier may mean that the UE starts to communicate with a certain UE on the carrier, and there is no restriction on the communication between the UE and other UEs on the carrier. Then in S301, if the first indication information instructs the UE to "deactivate" the third carrier, it may specifically instruct the UE to deactivate a certain transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, and if the first indication information indicates the UE to "activate" The second carrier may specifically instruct the UE to activate the transmission function of the second UE on the carrier. The transmission function includes, for example, a function of the second UE sending information to the first UE, and a function of the second UE receiving information from the first UE. In addition, if the first indication information indicates that the UE "deactivates" the third carrier, the UE may disable the first timer corresponding to the third carrier in addition to deactivating the transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier.
2、第二种方式。2. The second way.
在这种方式下，第二UE对于不同的载波可以分别维护两个定时器，例如称为第三定时器和第四定时器，第三定时器的数量与第二UE被配置(或，第二UE接受)的载波的数量相同，第四定时器的数量也与第二UE被配置(或，第二UE接受)的载波的数量相同。第三定时器的定时时长可由第一UE配置，或者由第二UE配置，或者由第一接入网设备配置，或者也可以预配置在第二UE中。第四定时器的定时时长可由第一UE配置，或者由第二UE配置，或者由第一接入网设备配置，或者也可以预配置在第二UE中。第三定时器的定时时长与第四定时器的定时时长可以相等，也可以不相等。可选的，第二UE可以同时维护第三定时器和第四定时器，或者也可以只是维护这两个定时器中的任意一个。 本申请实施例以第二UE同时维护第三定时器和第四定时器为例。In this manner, the second UE can maintain two timers for different carriers, for example, the third timer and the fourth timer, and the number of the third timer is the same as that configured by the second UE (or, the first The number of carriers accepted by the second UE is the same, and the number of the fourth timer is also the same as the number of carriers configured (or accepted by the second UE). The timing duration of the third timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the second UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the second UE. The timing duration of the fourth timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the second UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the second UE. The timing duration of the third timer and the timing duration of the fourth timer may or may not be equal. Optionally, the second UE may maintain the third timer and the fourth timer at the same time, or may only maintain any one of the two timers. In this embodiment of the present application, the second UE maintains the third timer and the fourth timer at the same time as an example.
其中，一个载波对应的第三定时器用于监测第二UE在该载波上的第一传输功能，第一传输功能例如包括第二UE向第一UE发送信息。或者说，第一传输功能可包括第二UE向第一UE发送信息的功能。Wherein, the third timer corresponding to a carrier is used to monitor the first transmission function of the second UE on the carrier, and the first transmission function includes, for example, sending information from the second UE to the first UE. In other words, the first transmission function may include a function of the second UE sending information to the first UE.
本申请实施例中，当第二UE在一个载波上的第一传输功能被激活时，和/或第二UE在该载波上与第一UE执行第一传输功能时，第二UE可以启动或重启该载波对应的第三定时器。在这种情况下，S301中的第一指示信息如果指示激活第二载波，则具体可以指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第一传输功能和/或第二传输功能；或者，S301中的第一指示信息如果指示去激活第三载波，则具体可以指示去激活第二UE在第三载波上的第一传输功能和/或第二传输功能。In this embodiment of the present application, when the first transmission function of the second UE on a carrier is activated, and/or when the second UE performs the first transmission function with the first UE on the carrier, the second UE may start or Restart the third timer corresponding to the carrier. In this case, if the first instruction information in S301 indicates to activate the second carrier, it may specifically indicate to activate the first transmission function and/or the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier; or, in S301 If the first instruction information indicates to deactivate the third carrier, it may specifically indicate to deactivate the first transmission function and/or the second transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier.
例如第一指示信息指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第一传输功能，则第二UE在接收第一指示信息完毕时，可以启动或重启第二载波对应的第三定时器。例如，第一指示信息承载在PSSCH中，那么第二UE可以在该PSSCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第三定时器。而如果第一指示信息指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第二传输功能，且未指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第一传输功能，则第二载波对应的第三定时器维持不变。For example, the first indication information indicates to activate the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, and the second UE may start or restart the third timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information. For example, if the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, then the second UE may start or restart the third timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH. And if the first indication information indicates to activate the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, and does not indicate to activate the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, the third timer corresponding to the second carrier stay the same.
如果第二UE在某个载波上与第一UE执行了第一传输功能，则第二UE可以启动或重启该载波对应的第三定时器。例如，第一传输功能为第二UE向第一UE发送信息，那么，如果第二UE在某个载波上向第一UE发送了SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项，则第二UE可以启动或重启该载波所对应的第三定时器。例如，第二UE可以在向第一UE发送信息(该信息例如包括SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项)结束后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启相应的第三定时器。If the second UE performs the first transmission function with the first UE on a certain carrier, the second UE may start or restart a third timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, the first transmission function is for the second UE to send information to the first UE, so if the second UE sends one of the information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU to the first UE on a certain carrier item or items, the second UE may start or restart the third timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, the second UE may start or end the first time unit after sending information to the first UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU) to the first UE. The corresponding third timer is restarted.
例如，第二UE在接收用于指示激活第二载波的第一指示信息后，启动了第二载波对应的第三定时器。在该第三定时器超时前，第二UE又在第二载波上与第一UE执行了第一传输功能，那么第二UE可以重启该第三定时器。For example, the second UE starts a third timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information for indicating activation of the second carrier. Before the third timer expires, the second UE performs the first transmission function with the first UE on the second carrier, then the second UE may restart the third timer.
在第二UE启动或重启某个载波对应的第三定时器后，如果该第三定时器超时，则第二UE可以去激活第二UE在该第三定时器所对应的载波上的第一传输功能。或者，如果S301中的第一指示信息指示去激活第二UE在第三载波上的第一传输功能，则第二UE也可以去激活第二UE在第三载波上的第一传输功能，另外，第二UE还可以关闭第三载波对应的第三定时器。第二UE去激活第二UE在某个载波上的第一传输功能，可以实现为，第二UE不再在该载波上执行第一传输功能，但是对于第二UE在该载波上的其他传输功能不限制，例如第二UE还可能在该载波上执行第二传输功能(如果第四定时器未超时)，和/或在该载波上执行与其他UE之间的传输功能等。这样，即使第二UE未收到来自第一UE的用于去激活该载波的指示，或第一UE未向第二UE指示去激活载波，第二UE也可以通过第三定时器来自行去激活在相应的载波上的传输功能，以减小第二UE的功耗。而且由于不限制第二UE在该载波上的其他传输功能，因此可以提高载波的利用率。After the second UE starts or restarts the third timer corresponding to a certain carrier, if the third timer times out, the second UE may deactivate the second UE's first timer on the carrier corresponding to the third timer. transfer function. Or, if the first indication information in S301 indicates to deactivate the first transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, the second UE may also deactivate the first transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, and , the second UE may also disable the third timer corresponding to the third carrier. The deactivation of the first transmission function of the second UE on a certain carrier by the second UE may be implemented in that the second UE no longer performs the first transmission function on the carrier, but for other transmissions of the second UE on the carrier The function is not limited, for example, the second UE may also perform a second transmission function on the carrier (if the fourth timer does not expire), and/or perform a transmission function with other UEs on the carrier, etc. In this way, even if the second UE does not receive an instruction to deactivate the carrier from the first UE, or the first UE does not instruct the second UE to deactivate the carrier, the second UE can also deactivate the carrier by itself through the third timer. The transmission function on the corresponding carrier is activated to reduce the power consumption of the second UE. Moreover, since other transmission functions of the second UE on the carrier are not restricted, the utilization rate of the carrier can be improved.
一个载波对应的第四定时器用于监测第二UE在该载波上的第二传输功能，第二传输功能例如包括第二UE从第一UE接收信息。或者说，第二传输功能可包括第二UE从第一UE接收信息的功能。 A fourth timer corresponding to a carrier is used to monitor a second transmission function of the second UE on the carrier, where the second transmission function includes, for example, that the second UE receives information from the first UE. Alternatively, the second transmission function may include a function for the second UE to receive information from the first UE.
本申请实施例中，当第二UE在一个载波上的第二传输功能被激活时，和/或第二UE在该载波上与第一UE执行第二传输功能时，第二UE可以启动或重启该载波对应的第四定时器。In this embodiment of the present application, when the second transmission function of the second UE on a carrier is activated, and/or when the second UE performs the second transmission function with the first UE on the carrier, the second UE may start or Restart the fourth timer corresponding to the carrier.
例如第一指示信息指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第二传输功能，则第二UE在接收第一指示信息完毕时，可以启动或重启第二载波对应的第四定时器。例如，第一指示信息承载在PSSCH中，那么第二UE可以在该PSSCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第四定时器。而如果第一指示信息指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第一传输功能，且未指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第二传输功能，则第二载波对应的第四定时器维持不变。For example, the first indication information indicates to activate the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, and the second UE may start or restart a fourth timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the first indication information. For example, if the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, then the second UE may start or restart the fourth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH. And if the first indication information indicates to activate the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, and does not indicate to activate the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, then the fourth timer corresponding to the second carrier stay the same.
如果第二UE在某个载波上与第一UE执行了第二传输功能，则第二UE可以启动或重启该载波对应的第四定时器。例如，第一传输功能为第二UE从第一UE接收信息，那么，如果第二UE在某个载波上从第一UE接收了SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项，则第二UE可以启动或重启该载波所对应的第四定时器。例如，第二UE可以在从第一UE接收信息(该信息例如包括SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项)结束后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启相应的第四定时器。If the second UE performs the second transmission function with the first UE on a certain carrier, the second UE may start or restart a fourth timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, the first transmission function is that the second UE receives information from the first UE, then if the second UE receives one of the information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU from the first UE on a certain carrier item or items, the second UE may start or restart the fourth timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, the second UE may start or end the first time unit after receiving information from the first UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU). The corresponding fourth timer is restarted.
在第二UE启动或重启某个载波对应的第四定时器后，如果该第四定时器超时，则第二UE可以去激活第二UE在该第三定时器所对应的载波上的第二传输功能。或者，如果S301中的第一指示信息指示去激活第二UE在第三载波上的第二传输功能，则第二UE也可以去激活第二UE在第三载波上的第二传输功能，另外，第二UE还可以关闭第三载波对应的第四定时器。第二UE去激活第二UE在某个载波上的第二传输功能，可以实现为，第二UE不再在该载波上执行第二传输功能，但是对于第二UE在该载波上的其他传输功能不限制，例如第二UE还可能在该载波上执行第一传输功能(如果第三定时器未超时)，和/或在该载波上执行与其他UE之间的传输功能等。这样，即使第二UE未收到来自第一UE的用于去激活该载波的指示，或第一UE未向第二UE指示去激活载波，第二UE也可以通过第四定时器来自行去激活在相应的载波上的传输功能，以减小第二UE的功耗。而且由于不限制第二UE在该载波上的其他传输功能，因此可以提高载波的利用率。After the second UE starts or restarts the fourth timer corresponding to a certain carrier, if the fourth timer expires, the second UE may deactivate the second UE on the carrier corresponding to the third timer. transfer function. Or, if the first indication information in S301 indicates to deactivate the second transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, the second UE may also deactivate the second transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, and , the second UE may also disable the fourth timer corresponding to the third carrier. The deactivation of the second transmission function of the second UE on a certain carrier by the second UE may be realized in that the second UE no longer performs the second transmission function on the carrier, but for other transmissions of the second UE on the carrier The function is not limited, for example, the second UE may also perform the first transmission function on the carrier (if the third timer has not expired), and/or perform the transmission function with other UEs on the carrier, etc. In this way, even if the second UE does not receive an instruction to deactivate the carrier from the first UE, or the first UE does not instruct the second UE to deactivate the carrier, the second UE can also deactivate the carrier by itself through the fourth timer. The transmission function on the corresponding carrier is activated to reduce the power consumption of the second UE. Moreover, since other transmission functions of the second UE on the carrier are not restricted, the utilization rate of the carrier can be improved.
在第二种方式下，一个载波对应的第三定时器和第四定时器可以分别监测不同的传输功能，可以对第二UE的传输功能实现更细粒度的控制，例如第二UE的一种传输功能被去激活时，另一种传输功能以及其他传输功能可能依然可以使用，由此能够提高第二UE的传输效率。In the second method, the third timer and the fourth timer corresponding to a carrier can monitor different transmission functions respectively, and can realize finer-grained control over the transmission function of the second UE, for example, a kind of transmission function of the second UE When the transmission function is deactivated, another transmission function and other transmission functions may still be available, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the second UE.
S303、第一UE启动或重启定时器。S303. The first UE starts or restarts a timer.
因为第一UE与第二UE之间的载波是第一UE和第二UE都使用的，如果只是第二UE根据定时器单方面去激活了某个载波，或者去激活了在某个载波上的部分传输功能，而第一UE对此不知情，则第一UE还可能通过该载波与第二UE通信，这可能导致信息丢失。因此，为了使得两端的信息对等，第一UE也可以针对载波维护相应的定时器，从而通过定时器来控制载波(或传输功能)的激活或去激活。第一UE维护定时器的方式与第二UE维护定时器的方式是相对应的，下面举例介绍。Because the carrier between the first UE and the second UE is used by both the first UE and the second UE, if only the second UE unilaterally deactivates a certain carrier according to the timer, or deactivates a certain carrier on a certain carrier Part of the transmission function of the carrier, but the first UE does not know about it, the first UE may also communicate with the second UE through the carrier, which may lead to information loss. Therefore, in order to make the information at both ends equal, the first UE may also maintain a corresponding timer for the carrier, so as to control the activation or deactivation of the carrier (or transmission function) through the timer. The manner in which the first UE maintains the timer corresponds to the manner in which the second UE maintains the timer, and an example is introduced below.
3、第三种方式。这实际上是第一UE维护定时器的第一种方式，但为了避免与S302中的第一种方式混淆，因此将第一UE的方式称为第三种方式。 3. The third way. This is actually the first way for the first UE to maintain the timer, but to avoid confusion with the first way in S302, the way for the first UE is called the third way.
在这种方式下，第一UE对于不同的载波可以分别维护一个定时器，第一UE针对载波所维护的定时器的数量与第一UE配置给第二UE的载波(或者，第二UE所接受的载波)的数量相同。第一UE所维护的定时器的定时时长可由第一UE配置，或者由第一接入网设备配置，或者也可以预配置在第一UE中。第一UE所维护的定时器也可以称为第一定时器，或者为了与第二UE维护的定时器相区分，可将第一UE维护的定时器称为第二定时器。In this way, the first UE can maintain a timer for different carriers, and the number of timers maintained by the first UE for the carrier is the same as the carrier configured by the first UE for the second UE (or, The number of accepted carriers) is the same. The timing duration of the timer maintained by the first UE may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the first UE. The timer maintained by the first UE may also be called a first timer, or to distinguish it from the timer maintained by the second UE, the timer maintained by the first UE may be called a second timer.
本申请实施例中，第一UE可以在如下的一种或多种情况下启动或重启一个载波对应的第二定时器：该载波被激活时，在该载波上从第二UE接收信息时，或，在该载波上向第二UE发送信息时。In this embodiment of the application, the first UE may start or restart a second timer corresponding to a carrier under one or more of the following conditions: when the carrier is activated, when receiving information from the second UE on the carrier, Or, when sending information to the second UE on the carrier.
例如第一指示信息指示激活第二载波，则第一UE在发送第一指示信息完毕时，可以启动或重启第二载波对应的第二定时器。例如，第一指示信息承载在PSSCH中，那么第一UE可以在该PSSCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第二载波对应的第二定时器。又例如，第一UE是从第一接入网设备接收了第二指示信息，且第二指示信息指示激活第二载波，那么第一UE也可以在第二指示信息接收完毕时启动或重启第二载波对应的第二定时器。例如，第二指示信息承载在物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDCCH)中，则第一UE可以在该PDSCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第二载波对应的第二定时器。For example, the first indication information indicates to activate the second carrier, and the first UE may start or restart the second timer corresponding to the second carrier after sending the first indication information. For example, if the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, then the first UE may start or restart the second timer corresponding to the second carrier within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH. For another example, the first UE receives the second indication information from the first access network device, and the second indication information indicates activation of the second carrier, then the first UE may also start or restart the second carrier after receiving the second indication information. The second timer corresponding to the two carriers. For example, the second indication information is carried in the physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDCCH), then the first UE can start or restart the second timing corresponding to the second carrier in the first time unit after the end of the PDSCH device.
如果第一UE在一个载波上向第二UE发送了信息，则第一UE可以启动或重启该载波对应的第二定时器。例如，第一UE在某个载波上向第二UE发送了SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU中的一项或多项，则第一UE可以启动或重启该载波所对应的第二定时器。例如，第一UE可以在向第一UE发送信息(该信息例如为SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项)完毕后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启相应的第二定时器。If the first UE sends information to the second UE on a carrier, the first UE may start or restart the second timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, if the first UE sends one or more items of SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU to the second UE on a certain carrier, the first UE can start or restart the second UE corresponding to the carrier. timer. For example, in the first time unit after sending information to the first UE (the information is, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU), start or The corresponding second timer is restarted.
如果第一UE在某个载波上从第一UE接收了SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项，则第一UE可以启动或重启该载波所对应的第二定时器。例如，第一UE可以在从第而UE接收信息(该信息例如包括SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等信息中的一项或多项)结束后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启相应的第二定时器。If the first UE receives one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU from the first UE on a certain carrier, the first UE can start or restart the first UE corresponding to the carrier. Two timers. For example, the first UE may start or end the first time unit after receiving information from the second UE (the information includes, for example, one or more items of information such as SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC PDU). The corresponding second timer is restarted.
例如，第一UE在接收用于指示激活第二载波的第二指示信息后，或者在发送用于指示激活第二载波的第一指示信息后，启动了第二载波对应的第二定时器。在该第二定时器超时前，第一UE又在第二载波上向第二UE发送了SCI或在第二载波上从第二UE接收了PSSCH，那么第一UE可以重启该第二定时器。For example, the first UE starts the second timer corresponding to the second carrier after receiving the second indication information for indicating activation of the second carrier, or after sending the first indication information for indicating activation of the second carrier. Before the second timer expires, the first UE sends SCI to the second UE on the second carrier or receives PSSCH from the second UE on the second carrier, then the first UE can restart the second timer .
在第一种方式下，在第一UE启动或重启某个载波对应的第二定时器后，如果第二定时器超时，则第一UE可以去激活该第二定时器所对应的载波。如果第一UE去激活了某个载波，则第一UE不再在该载波上向第二UE发送信息，例如不再在该载波上向第二UE发送SCI、PSSCH、SCI和PSSCH、或MAC PDU等。这样，第二UE和第一UE可以同步维护载波的激活与去激活的信息，使得第一UE和第二UE对于载波的使用情况一致，减少信息丢失，也能节省第二UE的功耗。或者，如果第一UE去激活了某个载波，则第一UE可以不再在该载波上监听/接收来自第二UE的信息，以及也不再在该载波上向第二UE发送信息，即，第一UE不再在该载波上与第二UE通信。但是第一UE还是可以继续 利用该载波与其他UE通信，例如第一UE可以继续在该载波上向其他UE发送信息，和/或在该载波上监听/接收来自其他UE的信息，这样可以提高载波的利用率。无论采用如上哪种方式，由于第一UE和第二UE都维护了定时器，则可以减少第一UE向第二UE发送的用于去激活载波的指示信息的数量，由此能够节省信令开销。In the first manner, after the first UE starts or restarts the second timer corresponding to a certain carrier, if the second timer times out, the first UE may deactivate the carrier corresponding to the second timer. If the first UE deactivates a certain carrier, the first UE will no longer send information on the carrier to the second UE, for example, no longer send SCI, PSSCH, SCI and PSSCH, or MAC to the second UE on the carrier PDUs, etc. In this way, the second UE and the first UE can maintain carrier activation and deactivation information synchronously, so that the first UE and the second UE use the same carrier, reduce information loss, and save power consumption of the second UE. Or, if the first UE deactivates a certain carrier, the first UE may no longer monitor/receive information from the second UE on the carrier, and no longer send information to the second UE on the carrier, that is , the first UE no longer communicates with the second UE on the carrier. But the first UE can still continue Using the carrier to communicate with other UEs, for example, the first UE can continue to send information to other UEs on the carrier, and/or monitor/receive information from other UEs on the carrier, which can improve the utilization of the carrier. No matter which of the above methods is adopted, since both the first UE and the second UE maintain the timer, the amount of indication information for deactivating the carrier sent by the first UE to the second UE can be reduced, thereby saving signaling overhead.
在第三种方式下，对于一个UE“去激活”某个载波或“激活”某个载波的理解，可参考S302。In the third manner, for an understanding of a UE "deactivating" a certain carrier or "activating" a certain carrier, reference may be made to S302.
4、第四种方式。这实际上是第一UE维护定时器的第一种方式，为了避免与S302中的第二种方式混淆，因此将第一UE的方式称为第四种方式。4. The fourth way. This is actually the first way for the first UE to maintain the timer. In order to avoid confusion with the second way in S302, the way for the first UE is called the fourth way.
在这种方式下，第一UE对于不同的载波可以分别维护两个定时器，例如称为第五定时器和第六定时器，第五定时器的数量与第二UE被配置(或，第二UE接受)的载波的数量相同，第六定时器的数量也与第二UE被配置(或，第二UE接受)的载波的数量相同。第五定时器的定时时长可由第一UE配置，或者由第二UE配置，或者由第一接入网设备配置，或者也可以预配置在第一UE中。第六定时器的定时时长可由第一UE配置，或者由第二UE配置，或者由第一接入网设备配置，或者也可以预配置在第二UE中。第五定时器的定时时长与第六定时器的定时时长可以相等，也可以不相等。可选的，第一UE可以同时维护第五定时器和第六定时器，或者也可以只是维护这两个定时器中的任意一个。本申请实施例以第一UE同时维护第五定时器和第六定时器为例。In this way, the first UE can maintain two timers for different carriers, for example, the fifth timer and the sixth timer, and the number of the fifth timer is the same as that configured by the second UE (or, the second timer The number of carriers accepted by the second UE is the same, and the number of the sixth timer is also the same as the number of carriers configured (or accepted by the second UE). The timing duration of the fifth timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the second UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the first UE. The timing duration of the sixth timer may be configured by the first UE, or configured by the second UE, or configured by the first access network device, or may also be pre-configured in the second UE. The timing duration of the fifth timer and the timing duration of the sixth timer may or may not be equal. Optionally, the first UE may maintain the fifth timer and the sixth timer at the same time, or may only maintain any one of the two timers. In this embodiment of the present application, the first UE maintains the fifth timer and the sixth timer at the same time as an example.
其中，一个载波对应的第五定时器用于监测第一UE在该载波上的第三传输功能，第三传输功能例如包括第一UE从第二UE接收信息。或者说，第三传输功能可包括第一UE从第二UE接收信息的功能。第一UE的第三传输功能例如与第二UE的第一传输功能对应。例如，第二UE的第一传输功能包括第二UE向第一UE发送信息，第一UE的第三传输功能包括第一UE从第二UE接收信息。Wherein, a fifth timer corresponding to a carrier is used for monitoring a third transmission function of the first UE on the carrier, where the third transmission function includes, for example, that the first UE receives information from the second UE. Alternatively, the third transmission function may include a function for the first UE to receive information from the second UE. For example, the third transmission function of the first UE corresponds to the first transmission function of the second UE. For example, the first transmission function of the second UE includes the second UE sending information to the first UE, and the third transmission function of the first UE includes the first UE receiving information from the second UE.
本申请实施例中，当第一UE在一个载波上的第三传输功能被激活时，和/或第一UE在该载波上与第二UE执行第三传输功能时，第一UE可以启动或重启该载波对应的第五定时器。在这种情况下，如果第一UE是根据接入网设备的指示确定激活或去激活载波，那么，第二指示信息如果指示激活第二载波，则具体可以指示激活第一UE在第二载波上的第三传输功能和/或第四传输功能；或者，第二指示信息如果指示去激活第三载波，则具体可以指示去激活第一UE在第三载波上的第三传输功能和/或第四传输功能。In this embodiment of the present application, when the third transmission function of the first UE on a carrier is activated, and/or when the first UE performs the third transmission function with the second UE on the carrier, the first UE may start or Restart the fifth timer corresponding to the carrier. In this case, if the first UE determines to activate or deactivate the carrier according to the instruction of the access network device, then if the second instruction information indicates that the second carrier is activated, it may specifically indicate that the first UE is activated on the second carrier. or, if the second indication information indicates deactivation of the third carrier, it may specifically indicate deactivation of the third transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier and/or Fourth transfer function.
例如第二指示信息指示激活第一UE在第二载波上的第三传输功能，或者第一UE根据S301所介绍的任一种方式确定激活第一UE在第二载波上的第三传输功能，则第一UE在接收第二指示信息完毕时，或者在发送第一指示信息(第一指示信息指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第一传输功能)完毕时，可以启动或重启第二载波对应的第五定时器。例如，第二指示信息承载在PDCCH中，那么第一UE可以在该PDCCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第五定时器。又例如，第一指示信息承载在PSSCH中，第一UE可以在该PSSCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第五定时器。而如果第二指示信息指示激活第一UE在第二载波上的第四传输功能，且未指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第三传输功能，或者第一UE确定不激活第一UE在第二载波上的第三传输功能，或者第一指示信息指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第二传输功能且未指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第一传输功能，则第二载波对应的第五定时器维持不变。For example, the second indication information indicates to activate the third transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier, or the first UE determines to activate the third transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier according to any of the methods introduced in S301, Then, when the first UE finishes receiving the second indication information, or finishes sending the first indication information (the first indication information indicates activation of the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier), the second UE may start or restart the second transmission function. The fifth timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, if the second indication information is carried in the PDCCH, then the first UE may start or restart the fifth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PDCCH. For another example, the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, and the first UE may start or restart the fifth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH. And if the second indication information indicates to activate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier, and does not indicate to activate the third transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, or the first UE determines not to activate the first UE The third transmission function on the second carrier, or the first indication information indicates activation of the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier and does not indicate activation of the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, then The fifth timer corresponding to the second carrier remains unchanged.
如果第一UE在某个载波上与第二UE执行了第三传输功能，则第一UE可以启动或 重启该载波对应的第五定时器。对此可参考S302的相关介绍。If the first UE performs the third transmission function with the second UE on a certain carrier, the first UE may start or Restart the fifth timer corresponding to the carrier. For this, refer to the related introduction of S302.
在第一UE启动或重启某个载波对应的第五定时器后，如果该第五定时器超时，则第一UE可以去激活第一UE在该第五定时器所对应的载波上的第三传输功能。或者，如果S301中的第一指示信息指示去激活第二UE在第三载波上的第一传输功能，或者第二指示信息指示去激活第一UE在第三载波上的第三传输功能，则第一UE也可以去激活第一UE在第三载波上的第三传输功能，另外，第一UE还可以关闭第三载波对应的第五定时器。第一UE去激活第一UE在某个载波上的第三传输功能，可以实现为，第一UE不再在该载波上执行第三传输功能，但是对于第一UE在该载波上的其他传输功能不限制，例如第一UE还可能在该载波上执行第四传输功能(如果第六定时器未超时)，和/或在该载波上执行与其他UE之间的传输功能等。这样，即使第一UE未收到来自接入网设备的用于去激活该载波的指示，或第一UE未根据S301所介绍的方式确定是否去激活载波，第一UE也可以通过第五定时器来自行去激活在相应的载波上的传输功能，以减小第一UE的功耗。而且由于不限制第一UE在该载波上的其他传输功能，因此可以提高载波的利用率。After the first UE starts or restarts the fifth timer corresponding to a certain carrier, if the fifth timer times out, the first UE may deactivate the first UE's third timer on the carrier corresponding to the fifth timer. transfer function. Or, if the first indication information in S301 indicates to deactivate the first transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, or the second indication information indicates to deactivate the third transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier, then The first UE may also deactivate the third transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier, and in addition, the first UE may also disable the fifth timer corresponding to the third carrier. The deactivation of the third transmission function of the first UE on a certain carrier by the first UE may be realized in that the first UE no longer performs the third transmission function on the carrier, but for other transmissions of the first UE on the carrier The function is not limited, for example, the first UE may also perform the fourth transmission function on the carrier (if the sixth timer has not expired), and/or perform the transmission function with other UEs on the carrier, etc. In this way, even if the first UE does not receive an instruction to deactivate the carrier from the access network device, or the first UE does not determine whether to deactivate the carrier according to the method introduced in S301, the first UE can pass the fifth timing The device automatically deactivates the transmission function on the corresponding carrier, so as to reduce the power consumption of the first UE. Moreover, since other transmission functions of the first UE on the carrier are not restricted, the utilization rate of the carrier can be improved.
一个载波对应的第六定时器用于监测第一UE在该载波上的第四传输功能，第四传输功能例如包括第一UE向第二UE发送信息。或者说，第四传输功能可包括第一UE向第二UE发送信息的功能。例如，第一UE的第四传输功能与第二UE的第二传输功能对应。例如，第一UE的第四传输功能包括第一UE向第二UE发送信息，第二UE的第二传输功能包括第二UE从第一UE接收信息。A sixth timer corresponding to a carrier is used to monitor a fourth transmission function of the first UE on the carrier, where the fourth transmission function includes, for example, sending information from the first UE to the second UE. In other words, the fourth transmission function may include a function of the first UE sending information to the second UE. For example, the fourth transmission function of the first UE corresponds to the second transmission function of the second UE. For example, the fourth transmission function of the first UE includes the first UE sending information to the second UE, and the second transmission function of the second UE includes the second UE receiving information from the first UE.
本申请实施例中，当第一UE在一个载波上的第四传输功能被激活时，和/或第一UE在该载波上与第二UE执行第四传输功能时，第一UE可以启动或重启该载波对应的第六定时器。In this embodiment of the present application, when the fourth transmission function of the first UE on a carrier is activated, and/or when the first UE performs the fourth transmission function with the second UE on the carrier, the first UE may start or Restart the sixth timer corresponding to the carrier.
例如第二指示信息指示激活第一UE在第二载波上的第四传输功能，或者第一UE根据S301所介绍的任一种方式确定激活第一UE在第二载波上的第四传输功能，则第一UE在接收第二指示信息完毕时，或者在发送第一指示信息(第一指示信息指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第二传输功能)完毕时，可以启动或重启第二载波对应的第六定时器。例如，第二指示信息承载在PDCCH中，那么第一UE可以在该PDCCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第六定时器。又例如，第一指示信息承载在PSSCH中，第一UE可以在该PSSCH结束后的第一个时间单元内启动或重启第六定时器。而如果第二指示信息指示激活第一UE在第二载波上的第三传输功能，且未指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第四传输功能，或者第一UE确定不激活第一UE在第二载波上的第四传输功能，或者第一指示信息指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第一传输功能且未指示激活第二UE在第二载波上的第二传输功能，则第二载波对应的第六定时器维持不变。For example, the second indication information indicates to activate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier, or the first UE determines to activate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier according to any method described in S301, Then, when the first UE finishes receiving the second indication information, or finishes sending the first indication information (the first indication information indicates activation of the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier), the second UE may start or restart the second transmission function. The sixth timer corresponding to the carrier. For example, if the second indication information is carried in the PDCCH, then the first UE may start or restart the sixth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PDCCH. For another example, the first indication information is carried in the PSSCH, and the first UE may start or restart the sixth timer within the first time unit after the end of the PSSCH. And if the second indication information indicates to activate the third transmission function of the first UE on the second carrier, and does not indicate to activate the fourth transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, or the first UE determines not to activate the first UE The fourth transmission function on the second carrier, or the first indication information indicates activation of the first transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier and does not indicate activation of the second transmission function of the second UE on the second carrier, then The sixth timer corresponding to the second carrier remains unchanged.
如果第一UE在某个载波上与第二UE执行了第四传输功能，则第一UE可以启动或重启该载波对应的第六定时器。对此可参考S302的相关介绍。If the first UE performs the fourth transmission function with the second UE on a certain carrier, the first UE may start or restart a sixth timer corresponding to the carrier. For this, refer to the related introduction of S302.
在第一UE启动或重启某个载波对应的第六定时器后，如果该第六定时器超时，则第一UE可以去激活第一UE在该第六定时器所对应的载波上的第四传输功能。或者，如果S301中的第一指示信息指示去激活第二UE在第三载波上的第二传输功能，或者第二指示信息指示去激活第一UE在第三载波上的第四传输功能，则第一UE也可以去激活第一UE在第三载波上的第四传输功能，另外，第一UE还可以关闭第三载波对应的第六定时器。第一UE去激活第一UE在某个载波上的第四传输功能，可以实现为，第一UE不再在该 载波上执行第四传输功能，但是对于第一UE在该载波上的其他传输功能不限制，例如第一UE还可能在该载波上执行第三传输功能(如果第五定时器未超时)，和/或在该载波上执行与其他UE之间的传输功能等。这样，即使第一UE未收到来自接入网设备的用于去激活该载波的指示，或第一UE未根据S301所介绍的方式确定是否去激活载波，第一UE也可以通过第六定时器来自行去激活在相应的载波上的传输功能，以减小第一UE的功耗。而且由于不限制第一UE在该载波上的其他传输功能，因此可以提高载波的利用率。After the first UE starts or restarts the sixth timer corresponding to a certain carrier, if the sixth timer expires, the first UE may deactivate the fourth timer of the first UE on the carrier corresponding to the sixth timer. transfer function. Or, if the first indication information in S301 indicates to deactivate the second transmission function of the second UE on the third carrier, or the second indication information indicates to deactivate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier, then The first UE may also deactivate the fourth transmission function of the first UE on the third carrier, and in addition, the first UE may also disable the sixth timer corresponding to the third carrier. The deactivation of the fourth transmission function of the first UE on a certain carrier by the first UE may be realized as that the first UE is no longer on the The fourth transmission function is performed on the carrier, but there is no restriction on other transmission functions of the first UE on the carrier, for example, the first UE may also perform the third transmission function on the carrier (if the fifth timer has not expired), and /or perform a transmission function with other UEs on the carrier, etc. In this way, even if the first UE does not receive an instruction to deactivate the carrier from the access network device, or the first UE does not determine whether to deactivate the carrier according to the method introduced in S301, the first UE can pass the sixth timing The device automatically deactivates the transmission function on the corresponding carrier, so as to reduce the power consumption of the first UE. Moreover, since other transmission functions of the first UE on the carrier are not restricted, the utilization rate of the carrier can be improved.
在第四种方式下，一个载波对应的第五定时器和第六定时器可以分别监测不同的传输功能，可以对第一UE的传输功能实现更细粒度的控制，例如第一UE的一种传输功能被去激活时，另一种传输功能以及其他传输功能可能依然可以使用，由此能够提高第一UE的传输效率。In the fourth mode, the fifth timer and the sixth timer corresponding to a carrier can monitor different transmission functions respectively, and can realize finer-grained control over the transmission function of the first UE, for example, a kind of transmission function of the first UE When the transmission function is deactivated, another transmission function and other transmission functions may still be available, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the first UE.
综上可知，本申请实施例所述的某个UE“激活”某个载波，可以是指该UE不在该载波上与任意UE通信，即，UE不再使用该载波；或者，也可以是指UE不再在该载波上执行部分传输功能，但不限制UE是否在该载波上执行其他传输功能。To sum up, it can be seen that the "activation" of a certain carrier by a certain UE in the embodiment of the present application may mean that the UE does not communicate with any UE on the carrier, that is, the UE no longer uses the carrier; or it may mean that the UE does not communicate with any UE on the carrier; The UE no longer performs some transmission functions on the carrier, but there is no restriction on whether the UE performs other transmission functions on the carrier.
S302与S303可以同时执行，或者S302在S303之前执行，或者S302在S303之后执行。S302 and S303 can be executed simultaneously, or S302 is executed before S303, or S302 is executed after S303.
本申请实施例中，第一UE或第一接入网设备可以根据第一UE与第二UE当前的通信情况确定激活或去激活相应的载波，或者激活或去激活UE在相应载波上的传输功能，既能满足数据传输需求，减小数据传输时延，也能减小UE的功耗。In this embodiment of the present application, the first UE or the first access network device may determine to activate or deactivate the corresponding carrier according to the current communication situation between the first UE and the second UE, or activate or deactivate the transmission of the UE on the corresponding carrier The function can not only meet the data transmission requirements, reduce the data transmission delay, but also reduce the power consumption of the UE.
图3所示的实施例与图2所示的实施例可以结合应用。例如通过图2所示的实施例可为第二UE配置载波，在确定第二UE所接受的载波后，可通过图3所示的实施例来激活或去激活相应的载波，或激活或去激活UE在相应载波上的传输功能。或者，图3所示的实施例和图2所示的实施例也可以不结合，而是各自单独应用。The embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 may be applied in combination. For example, a carrier can be configured for the second UE through the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 . After the carrier accepted by the second UE is determined, the corresponding carrier can be activated or deactivated through the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , or activated or deactivated. Activate the transmission function of the UE on the corresponding carrier. Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 and the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 may not be combined, but applied separately.
图4给出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。所述通信装置400可以是图2所示的实施例或图3所示的实施例所述的第一UE或该第一UE的电路***，用于实现上述方法实施例中对应于第一UE的方法。或者，所述通信装置400可以是图2所示的实施例或图3所示的实施例所述的第二UE或该第二UE的电路***，用于实现上述方法实施例中对应于第二UE的方法。或者，所述通信装置400可以是图2所示的实施例或图3所示的实施例所述的接入网设备或该接入网设备的电路***，用于实现上述方法实施例中对应于接入网设备的方法。具体的功能可以参见上述方法实施例中的说明。其中，例如一种电路***为芯片***。FIG. 4 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. The communication device 400 may be the first UE described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or the circuit system of the first UE, and is used to implement the method corresponding to the first UE in the above method embodiment. Methods. Alternatively, the communication device 400 may be the second UE or the circuit system of the second UE described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. Two UE methods. Alternatively, the communication device 400 may be the access network device or the circuit system of the access network device described in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 , and is used to implement the corresponding A method for access network equipment. For specific functions, refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments. Wherein, for example, a circuit system is a chip system.
该通信装置400包括至少一个处理器401。处理器401可以用于装置的内部处理，实现一定的控制处理功能。可选地，处理器401包括指令。可选地，处理器401可以存储数据。可选地，不同的处理器可以是独立的器件，可以位于不同物理位置，可以位于不同的集成电路上。可选地，不同的处理器可以集成在一个或多个处理器中，例如，集成在一个或多个集成电路上。The communication device 400 includes at least one processor 401 . The processor 401 can be used for internal processing of the device to realize certain control processing functions. Optionally, processor 401 includes instructions. Optionally, processor 401 may store data. Alternatively, different processors may be separate devices, may be located in different physical locations, and may be located on different integrated circuits. Alternatively, different processors may be integrated within one or more processors, eg, on one or more integrated circuits.
可选地，通信装置400包括一个或多个存储器403，用以存储指令。可选地，所述存储器403中还可以存储有数据。所述处理器和存储器可以单独设置，也可以集成在一起。Optionally, the communication device 400 includes one or more memories 403 for storing instructions. Optionally, data may also be stored in the memory 403 . The processor and memory can be set separately or integrated together.
可选地，通信装置400包括通信线路402，以及至少一个通信接口404。其中，因为存储器403、通信线路402以及通信接口404均为可选项，因此在图4中均以虚线表示。Optionally, the communication device 400 includes a communication line 402 and at least one communication interface 404 . Wherein, since the memory 403 , the communication line 402 and the communication interface 404 are all options, they are all indicated by dotted lines in FIG. 4 .
可选地，通信装置400还可以包括收发器和/或天线。其中，收发器可以用于向其他装 置发送信息或从其他装置接收信息。所述收发器可以称为收发机、收发电路、输入输出接口等，用于通过天线实现通信装置400的收发功能。可选地，收发器包括发射机(transmitter)和接收机(receiver)。示例性地，发射机可以用于将基带信号生成射频(radio frequency)信号，接收机可以用于将射频信号转换为基带信号。Optionally, the communication device 400 may further include a transceiver and/or an antenna. where the transceiver can be used to communicate to other mounted device to send messages or receive messages from other devices. The transceiver may be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, an input-output interface, etc., and is used to realize the transceiver function of the communication device 400 through an antenna. Optionally, the transceiver includes a transmitter (transmitter) and a receiver (receiver). Exemplarily, the transmitter can be used to generate a radio frequency (radio frequency) signal from a baseband signal, and the receiver can be used to convert the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal.
处理器401可以包括一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit，CPU)，微处理器，特定应用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，或一个或多个用于控制本申请实施例方案程序执行的集成电路。The processor 401 may include a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, a specific application integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), or one or more programs for controlling the implementation of the embodiment of the present application. integrated circuits.
通信线路402可包括一通路，在上述组件之间传送信息。Communication line 402 may include a pathway for communicating information between the above-described components.
通信接口404，使用任何收发器一类的装置，用于与其他设备或通信网络通信，如以太网，无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)，无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)，有线接入网等。Communication interface 404, using any device such as a transceiver, for communicating with other devices or communication networks, such as Ethernet, radio access network (radio access network, RAN), wireless local area network (wireless local area networks, WLAN), Wired access network, etc.
存储器403可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备，随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备，也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory，EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory，CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质，但不限于此。存储器403可以是独立存在，通过通信线路402与处理器401相连接。或者，存储器403也可以和处理器401集成在一起。Memory 403 may be read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory, RAM) or other types that can store information and instructions It can also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and can be programmed by a computer Any other medium accessed, but not limited to. The memory 403 may exist independently, and is connected to the processor 401 through the communication line 402 . Alternatively, the memory 403 can also be integrated with the processor 401 .
其中，存储器403用于存储执行本申请实施例方案的计算机执行指令，并由处理器401来控制执行。处理器401用于执行存储器403中存储的计算机执行指令，从而实现本申请实施例上述实施例提供的通信方法。Wherein, the memory 403 is used to store computer-executed instructions for executing the solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and the execution is controlled by the processor 401 . The processor 401 is configured to execute computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 403, so as to implement the communication method provided by the above-mentioned embodiments in the embodiments of the present application.
可选的，本申请实施例中的计算机执行指令也可以称之为应用程序代码，本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the computer-executed instructions in the embodiments of the present application may also be referred to as application program codes, which is not specifically limited in the embodiments of the present application.
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，处理器401可以包括一个或多个CPU，例如图4中的CPU0和CPU1。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the processor 401 may include one or more CPUs, for example, CPU0 and CPU1 in FIG. 4 .
在具体实现中，作为一种实施例，通信装置400可以包括多个处理器，例如图4中的处理器401和处理器408。这些处理器中的每一个可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器，也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the communication device 400 may include multiple processors, for example, the processor 401 and the processor 408 in FIG. 4 . Each of these processors may be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor. A processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
当图4所示的装置为芯片时，例如是第一UE的芯片，或第二UE的芯片，或接入网设备的芯片，则该芯片包括处理器401(还可以包括处理器408)、通信线路402、存储器403和通信接口404。具体地，通信接口404可以是输入接口、管脚或电路等。存储器403可以是寄存器、缓存等。处理器401和处理器408可以是一个通用的CPU，微处理器，ASIC，或一个或多个用于控制上述任一实施例的通信方法的程序执行的集成电路。When the apparatus shown in FIG. 4 is a chip, such as a chip of the first UE, or a chip of the second UE, or a chip of an access network device, the chip includes a processor 401 (may also include a processor 408), Communication line 402 , memory 403 and communication interface 404 . Specifically, the communication interface 404 may be an input interface, a pin, or a circuit. The memory 403 may be a register, a cache, and the like. The processor 401 and the processor 408 may be a general-purpose CPU, a microprocessor, an ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits for controlling program execution of the communication method in any of the above-mentioned embodiments.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对装置进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时 可以有另外的划分方式。比如，在采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块的情况下，图5示出了一种装置示意图，该装置500可以是上述各个方法实施例中所涉及的第一UE、第二UE或接入网设备，或者为第一UE中的芯片或第二UE中的芯片或接入网设备中的芯片。该装置500包括发送单元501、处理单元502和接收单元503。The embodiment of the present application may divide the device into functional modules according to the above method example, for example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, There may be another division method. For example, in the case of dividing each functional module corresponding to each function, FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a device, and the device 500 may be the first UE, the second UE or the access network involved in the above method embodiments. The device is either a chip in the first UE, a chip in the second UE, or a chip in the access network device. The apparatus 500 includes a sending unit 501 , a processing unit 502 and a receiving unit 503 .
应理解，该装置500可以用于实现本申请实施例的方法中由第一UE、第二UE或接入网设备执行的步骤，相关特征可以参照上文的各个实施例，此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the apparatus 500 can be used to implement the steps performed by the first UE, the second UE, or the access network device in the method of the embodiment of the present application, and related features can refer to the above embodiments, and will not be repeated here. .
可选的，图5中的发送单元501、接收单元503以及处理单元502的功能/实现过程可以通过图4中的处理器401调用存储器403中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者，图5中的处理单元502的功能/实现过程可以通过图4中的处理器401调用存储器403中存储的计算机执行指令来实现，图5中的发送单元501和接收单元503的功能/实现过程可以通过图4中的通信接口404来实现。Optionally, the functions/implementation process of the sending unit 501, the receiving unit 503, and the processing unit 502 in FIG. 5 may be implemented by the processor 401 in FIG. 4 invoking computer-executed instructions stored in the memory 403. Alternatively, the function/implementation process of the processing unit 502 in FIG. 5 can be realized by calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 403 by the processor 401 in FIG. The process may be implemented through communication interface 404 in FIG. 4 .
可选的，当该装置500是芯片或电路时，则发送单元501和接收单元503的功能/实现过程还可以通过管脚或电路等来实现。Optionally, when the device 500 is a chip or a circuit, the functions/implementation process of the sending unit 501 and the receiving unit 503 may also be implemented through pins or circuits.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序或指令，当该计算机程序或指令被运行时，实现前述方法实施例中由第一UE、第二UE或接入网设备所执行的方法。这样，上述实施例中所述功能可以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用。基于这样的理解，本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请实施例各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、ROM、RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores computer programs or instructions, and when the computer programs or instructions are executed, the first UE, the second A method performed by a UE or an access network device. In this way, the functions described in the above embodiments can be realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products. Based on such an understanding, the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including several The instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the embodiments of the present application. The storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, ROM, RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk and other various media that can store program codes.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行前述任一方法实施例中由第一UE、第二UE或接入网设备所执行的方法。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code is run on the computer, the computer is made to execute any one of the foregoing method embodiments by the first UE, the second 2. The method performed by the UE or the access network equipment.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置，包括处理器和接口；所述处理器用于执行上述任一方法实施例所涉及的第一UE、第二UE或接入网设备所执行的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a processing apparatus, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method performed by the first UE, the second UE, or the access network device involved in any one of the above method embodiments.
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, or a magnetic tape), an optical medium (such as a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (solid state disk, SSD)), etc.
本申请实施例中所描述的各种说明性的逻辑单元和电路可以通过通用处理器，数字信 号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)，专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array，FPGA)，或其它可编程逻辑装置，离散门或晶体管逻辑，离散硬件部件，或上述任何组合的设计来实现或操作所描述的功能。通用处理器可以为微处理器，可选地，该通用处理器也可以为任何传统的处理器、控制器、微控制器或状态机。处理器也可以通过计算装置的组合来实现，例如数字信号处理器和微处理器，多个微处理器，一个或多个微处理器联合一个数字信号处理器核，或任何其它类似的配置来实现。The various illustrative logic units and circuits described in the embodiments of this application can be processed by a general-purpose processor, digital signal Digital signal processor (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic , discrete hardware components, or any combination of the above designed to implement or operate the described functions. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, and optionally, the general-purpose processor may also be any conventional processor, controller, microcontroller or state machine. A processor may also be implemented by a combination of computing devices, such as a digital signal processor and a microprocessor, multiple microprocessors, one or more microprocessors combined with a digital signal processor core, or any other similar configuration to accomplish.
本申请实施例中所描述的方法或算法的步骤可以直接嵌入硬件、处理器执行的软件单元、或者这两者的结合。软件单元可以存储于RAM、闪存、ROM、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory，EPROM)、EEPROM、寄存器、硬盘、可移动磁盘、CD-ROM或本领域中其它任意形式的存储媒介中。示例性地，存储媒介可以与处理器连接，以使得处理器可以从存储媒介中读取信息，并可以向存储媒介存写信息。可选地，存储媒介还可以集成到处理器中。处理器和存储媒介可以设置于ASIC中，ASIC可以设置于终端设备中。可选地，处理器和存储媒介也可以设置于终端设备中的不同的部件中。The steps of the method or algorithm described in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embedded in hardware, a software unit executed by a processor, or a combination of both. The software unit may be stored in RAM, flash memory, ROM, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), EEPROM, registers, hard disk, removable disk, CD-ROM or any other form in the art in the storage medium. Exemplarily, the storage medium can be connected to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium, and can write information to the storage medium. Optionally, the storage medium can also be integrated into the processor. The processor and the storage medium can be set in the ASIC, and the ASIC can be set in the terminal device. Optionally, the processor and the storage medium may also be disposed in different components in the terminal device.
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上，使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理，从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。These computer program instructions can also be loaded onto a computer or other programmable data processing device, causing a series of operational steps to be performed on the computer or other programmable device to produce a computer-implemented process, thereby The instructions provide steps for implementing the functions specified in the flow chart or blocks of the flowchart and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请实施例进行了描述，显而易见的，在不脱离本申请实施例的范围的情况下，可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地，本申请实施例和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请实施例的示例性说明，且视为已覆盖本申请实施例范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本申请实施例进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请实施例的范围。这样，倘若本申请实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请实施例权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请实施例也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。 Although the embodiments of the present application have been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it is obvious that various modifications and combinations can be made thereto without departing from the scope of the embodiments of the present application. Correspondingly, the embodiments of the present application and the drawings are only exemplary descriptions of the embodiments of the present application defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to have covered any and all modifications, changes, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the embodiments of the present application things. Apparently, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the embodiments of the present application without departing from the scope of the embodiments of the present application. In this way, if the modifications and variations of the embodiments of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the embodiments of the present application and their equivalent technologies, the embodiments of the present application are also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (32)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第一终端设备，所述方法包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a first terminal device, the method comprising:
    确定N种载波配置，所述N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，N为正整数；Determine N types of carrier configurations, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier for the second terminal device to send information to the second terminal device The carrier of the information sent by the first terminal device, N is a positive integer;
    向所述第二终端设备发送第一配置信息，所述第一配置信息用于指示所述N种载波配置。Sending first configuration information to the second terminal device, where the first configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一配置信息包括所述载波的频率信息，或包括所述载波的索引。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first configuration information includes frequency information of the carrier, or includes an index of the carrier.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    从所述第二终端设备接收确认信息，所述确认信息用于指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置，或指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置包括的部分载波；或，Receive confirmation information from the second terminal device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the second terminal device to accept the first carrier configuration of the N types of carrier configurations, or to instruct the second terminal device to accept the N types of carrier configurations a portion of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration of the carrier configuration; or,
    从所述第二终端设备接收拒绝信息，所述拒绝信息用于指示所述第二终端设备拒绝所述N种载波配置；或，Receive rejection information from the second terminal device, where the rejection information is used to instruct the second terminal device to reject the N types of carrier configurations; or,
    从所述第二终端设备接收第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于指示所述第二终端设备期望的载波配置。Receive second configuration information from the second terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate a carrier configuration expected by the second terminal device.
  4. 根据权利要求1～3任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在确定N种载波配置之前，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein before determining the N types of carrier configurations, the method further comprises:
    从所述第二终端设备接收能力信息，所述能力信息包括如下一项或多项：所述第二终端设备支持的频带信息，所述第二终端设备支持的频带组合信息，或，所述第二终端设备对于多载波的支持能力信息。Receive capability information from the second terminal device, where the capability information includes one or more of the following: frequency band information supported by the second terminal device, frequency band combination information supported by the second terminal device, or, the Information about the support capability of the second terminal device for multiple carriers.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，在从所述第二终端设备接收能力信息之前，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 4, wherein before receiving capability information from the second terminal device, the method further comprises:
    向所述第二终端设备发送能力询问信息，所述能力询问信息用于请求所述第二终端设备提供能力信息。sending capability query information to the second terminal device, where the capability query information is used to request the second terminal device to provide capability information.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述能力询问信息还包括如下信息中的一项或多项：带宽信息，载波数量信息，或，分离等级信息，其中，The method according to claim 5, wherein the capability query information further includes one or more of the following information: bandwidth information, carrier quantity information, or separation level information, wherein,
    所述带宽信息用于指示所述第二终端设备提供能够支持所述带宽信息的频带或频带组合；The bandwidth information is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or combination of frequency bands that can support the bandwidth information;
    所述载波数量信息用于指示所述第二终端设备提供能够支持所述载波数量信息的频带或频带组合；The information on the number of carriers is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or combination of frequency bands capable of supporting the information on the number of carriers;
    所述分离等级信息用于指示所述第二终端设备提供能够支持所述分离等级信息的频带或频带组合。The separation level information is used to instruct the second terminal device to provide a frequency band or frequency band combination that can support the separation level information.
  7. 根据权利要求4～6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 4-6, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    向接入网设备发送所述能力信息。Send the capability information to the access network device.
  8. 根据权利要求1～7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，确定N种载波配置，包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein determining N types of carrier configurations includes:
    从接入网设备接收第三配置信息，所述第三配置信息用于指示所述N种载波配置。Receive third configuration information from the access network device, where the third configuration information is used to indicate the N types of carrier configurations.
  9. 根据权利要求1～8任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在确定N种载波配置之前，所 述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 1-8, characterized in that before determining the N types of carrier configurations, the The method also includes:
    从所述第二终端设备接收辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于指示K种载波配置，所述K种载波配置包括的载波为所述第二终端设备期望配置的载波，其中，所述K种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，K为正整数。Receive auxiliary information from the second terminal device, the auxiliary information is used to indicate K types of carrier configurations, and the carriers included in the K types of carrier configurations are carriers expected to be configured by the second terminal device, wherein the K types of carrier configurations include carriers that the second terminal device expects to configure. Each carrier configuration in the carrier configuration includes a carrier used for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device Carrier, K is a positive integer.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述N种载波配置所包括的载波是所述K种载波配置所包括的载波中的载波。The method according to claim 9, wherein the carriers included in the N carrier configurations are carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法，其特征在于，所述辅助信息包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的频率信息，或包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的索引。The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the auxiliary information includes frequency information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, or includes indexes of carriers included in the K carrier configurations.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述辅助信息还包括所述K种载波配置包括的载波的带宽信息，其中，所述K种载波配置包括的第一载波的带宽信息用于指示为所述第二终端设备配置的所述第一载波的带宽小于或等于所述带宽信息对应的带宽。The method according to claim 11, wherein the auxiliary information further includes bandwidth information of carriers included in the K carrier configurations, wherein the bandwidth information of the first carrier included in the K carrier configurations is used for Indicates that the bandwidth of the first carrier configured for the second terminal device is less than or equal to the bandwidth corresponding to the bandwidth information.
  13. 根据权利要求9～12任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述K种载波配置包括所述第二终端设备正在使用的载波。The method according to any one of claims 9-12, wherein the K types of carrier configurations include the carrier being used by the second terminal device.
  14. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    向所述第二终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示激活第二载波，所述第二载波是所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的载波。Sending first indication information to the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate activation of a second carrier, where the second carrier is a carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 14, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    从接入网设备接收第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示激活所述第二载波；或，receiving second indication information from an access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate activation of the second carrier; or,
    根据待传输的数据量与第一门限之间的对应关系，确定激活所述第二载波；或，Determine to activate the second carrier according to the correspondence between the amount of data to be transmitted and the first threshold; or,
    根据第一参数确定激活所述第二载波，所述第一参数包括如下一项或多项：所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的业务的QoS信息、所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波的CBR信息，或，所述第一终端设备缓存的数据量信息。The activation of the second carrier is determined according to a first parameter, where the first parameter includes one or more of the following: QoS information of services between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the first Carrier configuration or CBR information of the partial carrier, or information about the amount of data buffered by the first terminal device.
  16. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 3, further comprising:
    向所述第二终端设备发送第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示去激活第三载波，所述第三载波是所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的载波。Sending first indication information to the second terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate deactivation of a third carrier, where the third carrier is a carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 16, further comprising:
    从接入网设备接收第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示去激活所述第三载波；或，Receive third indication information from an access network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate deactivation of the third carrier; or,
    根据待传输的数据量与第一门限之间的对应关系，确定去激活所述第三载波；或，Determine to deactivate the third carrier according to the correspondence between the amount of data to be transmitted and the first threshold; or,
    根据第一参数确定去激活所述第三载波，所述第一参数包括如下一项或多项：所述第一终端设备与所述第二终端设备之间的业务的QoS信息、所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波的CBR信息，或，所述第一终端设备缓存的数据量信息。Determine to deactivate the third carrier according to a first parameter, where the first parameter includes one or more of the following: QoS information of a service between the first terminal device and the second terminal device, the first terminal device A carrier configuration or CBR information of the part of carriers, or information about the amount of data buffered by the first terminal device.
  18. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    当所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第二定时器；和/或，When the first carrier configuration or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier is activated, start or restart a second timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and/or,
    当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波向所述第二终端设备发送信息和/或从所述第二终端设备接收信息时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第二定时器。When sending information to the second terminal device and/or receiving information from the second terminal device through the first carrier configuration or the fourth carrier in the partial carrier, start or restart the connection with the fourth carrier corresponding to the second timer.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，当通过所述第一载波配置包括的第四载波向所述第二终端设备发送信息和/或从所述第二终端设备接收所述信息时，启动或重启 与所述第四载波对应的第二定时器，包括：The method according to claim 18, characterized in that when transmitting information to the second terminal device and/or receiving the information from the second terminal device via the fourth carrier included in the first carrier configuration , start or restart The second timer corresponding to the fourth carrier includes:
    在向所述第二终端设备发送所述信息或从所述第二终端设备接收所述信息完毕的时刻，启动或重启所述第二定时器；或，Starting or restarting the second timer at the moment when the sending of the information to the second terminal device or receiving the information from the second terminal device is completed; or,
    在向所述第二终端设备发送所述信息或从所述第二终端设备接收所述信息完毕后的第一个时间单元，启动或重启所述第二定时器。Starting or restarting the second timer in a first time unit after sending the information to the second terminal device or receiving the information from the second terminal device.
  20. 根据权利要求18或19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 18 or 19, further comprising:
    在所述第二定时器超时时，去激活所述第四载波。When the second timer expires, deactivate the fourth carrier.
  21. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    当所述第一终端设备在所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波上的第三传输功能被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第五定时器；和/或，When the third transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier in the first carrier configuration or the partial carrier is activated, start or restart a fifth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and / or,
    在通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波与所述第二终端设备执行第三传输功能时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第五定时器；When performing a third transmission function with the second terminal device through the configuration of the first carrier or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier, start or restart a fifth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier;
    其中，所述第三传输功能包括所述第一终端设备从所述第二终端设备接收信息。Wherein, the third transmission function includes the first terminal device receiving information from the second terminal device.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 21, further comprising:
    在所述第五定时器超时时，去激活所述第一终端设备在所述第四载波上的所述第三传输功能。When the fifth timer expires, deactivate the third transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier.
  23. 根据权利要求3、21或22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 3, 21 or 22, further comprising:
    当所述第一终端设备在所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波上的第四传输功能被激活时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第六定时器；和/或，When the fourth transmission function of the first terminal device on the first carrier configuration or the fourth carrier in the partial carrier is activated, start or restart a sixth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier; and / or,
    当通过所述第一载波配置或所述部分载波中的第四载波与所述第二终端设备执行第四传输功能时，启动或重启与所述第四载波对应的第六定时器；When performing a fourth transmission function with the second terminal device through the configuration of the first carrier or a fourth carrier in the partial carrier, start or restart a sixth timer corresponding to the fourth carrier;
    其中，所述第四传输功能包括所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息。Wherein, the fourth transmission function includes sending information from the first terminal device to the second terminal device.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 23, further comprising:
    在所述第六定时器超时时，去激活所述第一终端设备在所述第四载波上的所述第四传输功能。When the sixth timer expires, deactivate the fourth transmission function of the first terminal device on the fourth carrier.
  25. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，应用于第二终端设备，所述方法包括：A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a second terminal device, the method comprising:
    从第一终端设备接收第一配置信息；receiving first configuration information from a first terminal device;
    根据所述第一配置信息确定N种载波配置，所述N种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，N为正整数。Determine N types of carrier configurations according to the first configuration information, each of the N types of carrier configurations includes a carrier for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or, It includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device, and N is a positive integer.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to claim 25, further comprising:
    向所述第一终端设备发送确认信息，所述确认信息用于指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置，或指示所述第二终端设备接受所述N种载波配置的第一载波配置包括的部分载波；或，sending confirmation information to the first terminal device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the second terminal device to accept the first carrier configuration of the N types of carrier configurations, or to instruct the second terminal device to accept the N types of carrier configurations a portion of the carriers included in the first carrier configuration of the carrier configuration; or,
    向所述第一终端设备发送拒绝信息，所述拒绝信息用于指示所述第二终端设备拒绝所述N种载波配置；或，sending rejection information to the first terminal device, where the rejection information is used to instruct the second terminal device to reject the N types of carrier configurations; or,
    向所述第一终端设备发送第二配置信息，所述第二配置信息用于指示所述第二终端设备期望的载波配置。Sending second configuration information to the first terminal device, where the second configuration information is used to indicate the desired carrier configuration of the second terminal device.
  27. 根据权利要求25或26所述的方法，其特征在于，在从第一终端设备接收第一配置信息之前，所述方法还包括： The method according to claim 25 or 26, wherein before receiving the first configuration information from the first terminal device, the method further comprises:
    向所述第一终端设备发送所述第二终端设备的能力信息，所述能力信息包括如下一项或多项：所述第二终端设备支持的频带信息，所述第二终端设备支持的频带组合信息，或，所述第二终端设备对于多载波的支持能力信息。Send capability information of the second terminal device to the first terminal device, where the capability information includes one or more of the following: frequency band information supported by the second terminal device, frequency band information supported by the second terminal device Combination information, or information on the support capability of the second terminal device for multiple carriers.
  28. 根据权利要求25～27任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：The method according to any one of claims 25-27, characterized in that the method further comprises:
    向所述第一终端设备发送辅助信息，所述辅助信息用于指示K种载波配置，所述K种载波配置包括的载波为所述第二终端设备期望配置的载波，其中，所述K种载波配置中的每种载波配置包括用于所述第一终端设备向所述第二终端设备发送信息的载波，和/或，包括用于第二终端设备向所述第一终端设备发送信息的载波，K为正整数。Sending auxiliary information to the first terminal device, where the auxiliary information is used to indicate K types of carrier configurations, and the carriers included in the K types of carrier configurations are carriers expected to be configured by the second terminal device, where the K types of Each carrier configuration in the carrier configuration includes a carrier used for the first terminal device to send information to the second terminal device, and/or includes a carrier used for the second terminal device to send information to the first terminal device Carrier, K is a positive integer.
  29. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    一个或多个处理器；one or more processors;
    一个或多个存储器；one or more memories;
    以及一个或多个计算机程序，其中所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述一个或多个存储器中，所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令，当所述指令被所述通信设备的一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述通信设备执行如权利要求1～24中任一项所述的方法。and one or more computer programs, wherein the one or more computer programs are stored in the one or more memories, the one or more computer programs comprising instructions, when the instructions are executed by the communication device When executed by one or more processors, the communication device executes the method according to any one of claims 1-24.
  30. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括：A communication device, characterized in that it includes:
    一个或多个处理器；one or more processors;
    一个或多个存储器；one or more memories;
    以及一个或多个计算机程序，其中所述一个或多个计算机程序被存储在所述一个或多个存储器中，所述一个或多个计算机程序包括指令，当所述指令被所述通信设备的一个或多个处理器执行时，使得所述通信设备执行如权利要求25～28中任一项所述的方法。and one or more computer programs, wherein the one or more computer programs are stored in the one or more memories, the one or more computer programs comprising instructions, when the instructions are executed by the communication device When executed by one or more processors, the communication device executes the method according to any one of claims 25-28.
  31. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1～24中任一项所述的方法，或使得所述计算机执行如权利要求25～28中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1-24. The method described in claim 2, or causing the computer to execute the method described in any one of claims 25-28.
  32. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括一个或多个处理器和通信接口，所述一个或多个处理器用于读取指令，以执行如权利要求1～24中任一项所述的方法，或执行如权利要求25～28中任一项所述的方法。 A chip, characterized in that it includes one or more processors and a communication interface, and the one or more processors are used to read instructions to perform the method according to any one of claims 1-24, or Performing the method as claimed in any one of claims 25-28.
PCT/CN2023/077625 2022-03-01 2023-02-22 Communication method and device WO2023165387A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210194310 2022-03-01
CN202210194310.6 2022-03-01
CN202210420954.2 2022-04-20
CN202210420954.2A CN116761266A (en) 2022-03-01 2022-04-20 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023165387A1 true WO2023165387A1 (en) 2023-09-07

Family

ID=87882923

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/077625 WO2023165387A1 (en) 2022-03-01 2023-02-22 Communication method and device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2023165387A1 (en)

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110149183A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-20 华为技术有限公司 Communication equipment
WO2020063327A1 (en) * 2018-09-26 2020-04-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 Methods for selecting and configuring secondary link transmission resources and device
CN111757291A (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-09 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
WO2021062805A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2021081898A1 (en) * 2019-10-31 2021-05-06 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2021238786A1 (en) * 2020-05-25 2021-12-02 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication method, medium, and system

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110149183A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-20 华为技术有限公司 Communication equipment
WO2020063327A1 (en) * 2018-09-26 2020-04-02 维沃移动通信有限公司 Methods for selecting and configuring secondary link transmission resources and device
CN111757291A (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-09 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
WO2021062805A1 (en) * 2019-09-30 2021-04-08 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2021081898A1 (en) * 2019-10-31 2021-05-06 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2021238786A1 (en) * 2020-05-25 2021-12-02 华为技术有限公司 Wireless communication method, medium, and system

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LG ELECTRONICS: "LTE-based V2X Services", 3GPP TSG RAN MEETING #75 RP-170236, 18 March 2018 (2018-03-18), XP051506912 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11064559B2 (en) Method of sharing a UE receiver between D2D and cellular operations based on activity
EP3965440A1 (en) Sidelink communication method and apparatus, and storage medium
EP3143817B1 (en) Apparatus and method for resource allocation for device-to-device communications
US20200305139A1 (en) Semi-persistent scheduling method and apparatus
WO2019057154A1 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device and network device
CN107710810B (en) Inactive processing of devices with delay tolerant traffic
JP7498850B2 (en) Multiple DRX Settings for D2D Communication
JP2023518859A (en) Dynamic change of multicast/broadcast service delivery
WO2022022433A1 (en) Sidelink communication method and apparatus
JP2024507760A (en) Sidelink communication method and device
WO2020221313A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023165387A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2022178813A1 (en) Sidelink communication method and apparatus
WO2021232379A1 (en) Scheduling request processing method, apparatus, and system
WO2019226098A1 (en) Methods, transmitting node and receiving user equipment for handling a pdu based on 3gpp release, version or feature
CN116761266A (en) Communication method and device
WO2021032099A1 (en) Communication method and terminal
WO2024109556A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2019153344A1 (en) Process management method and terminal
US20240064857A1 (en) Terminal device, network node, and methods therein for drx configuration
WO2024067186A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023207631A1 (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2023072258A1 (en) Method and apparatus for carrier aggregation
WO2022237646A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting system information (si)
WO2024093832A1 (en) Resource selection method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23762787

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1